Dell Configuration Guide for the S6100–ON System 9.14.2.
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. © 2020 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
Contents 1 About this Guide......................................................................................................................... 32 Audience............................................................................................................................................................................... 32 Conventions..................................................................................................................................................................
Removing a Command from EXEC Mode..................................................................................................................56 Moving a Command from EXEC Privilege Mode to EXEC Mode........................................................................... 56 Allowing Access to CONFIGURATION Mode Commands....................................................................................... 56 Allowing Access to Different Modes..........................................................
Configuring dot1x Profile ................................................................................................................................................... 84 Configuring MAC addresses for a do1x Profile................................................................................................................85 Configuring the Static MAB and MAB Profile ................................................................................................................
Configuring a Standard IP ACL Filter......................................................................................................................... 118 Configure an Extended IP ACL......................................................................................................................................... 119 Configuring Filters with a Sequence Number...........................................................................................................
Implement BGP with Dell EMC Networking OS.......................................................................................................176 Configuration Information........................................................................................................................................... 179 Basic BGP configuration tasks.........................................................................................................................................
Troubleshoot CAM Profiling.............................................................................................................................................232 QoS CAM Region Limitation...................................................................................................................................... 232 Syslog Error When the Table is Full..........................................................................................................................
Configuring ETS in a DCB Map................................................................................................................................. 259 Hierarchical Scheduling in ETS Output Policies............................................................................................................ 260 Using ETS to Manage Converged Ethernet Traffic.....................................................................................................
Source Address Validation................................................................................................................................................297 Enabling IP Source Address Validation..................................................................................................................... 298 DHCP MAC Source Address Validation...................................................................................................................
Ring Status................................................................................................................................................................... 327 Multiple FRRP Rings....................................................................................................................................................327 Important FRRP Points.............................................................................................................................................
Enabling a Physical Interface........................................................................................................................................... 360 Physical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................................................361 Configuration Task List for Physical Interfaces........................................................................................................
Configure the MTU Size on an Interface....................................................................................................................... 386 Port-Pipes.......................................................................................................................................................................... 387 CR4 Auto-Negotiation.................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting UDP Helper.............................................................................................................................................411 22 IPv6 Routing........................................................................................................................... 412 Protocol Overview.............................................................................................................................................................
24 Intermediate System to Intermediate System............................................................................437 IS-IS Protocol Overview................................................................................................................................................... 437 IS-IS Addressing................................................................................................................................................................ 437 Multi-Topology IS-IS...........
Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking.................................................................................................................. 464 Important Points about Shared LAG State Tracking..............................................................................................465 LACP Basic Configuration Example................................................................................................................................465 Configure a LAG on ALPHA......................
Configuring LLDP Notification Interval...........................................................................................................................498 Configuring Transmit and Receive Mode.......................................................................................................................499 Configuring the Time to Live Value.................................................................................................................................499 Debugging LLDP......
Disable MLD Snooping................................................................................................................................................534 Configure the switch as a querier............................................................................................................................. 535 Specify port as connected to multicast router........................................................................................................
Protocol Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 573 Autonomous System (AS) Areas...............................................................................................................................573 Area Types....................................................................................................................................................................
Refuse Multicast Traffic..............................................................................................................................................618 Send Multicast Traffic................................................................................................................................................. 619 Configuring PIM-SM........................................................................................................................................................
Protocol Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 660 Implementation Information..............................................................................................................................................661 Configure Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus.......................................................................................................................
43 Routing Information Protocol (RIP)......................................................................................... 695 Protocol Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 695 RIPv1............................................................................................................................................................................. 695 RIPv2...............
Support for Change of Authorization and Disconnect Messages packets.......................................................... 735 TACACS+........................................................................................................................................................................... 744 Configuration Task List for TACACS+......................................................................................................................744 TACACS+ Remote Authentication.............
Enabling Drop Eligibility............................................................................................................................................... 778 Honoring the Incoming DEI Value.............................................................................................................................. 779 Marking Egress Packets with a DEI Value................................................................................................................
Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Running-Config......................................................................................803 Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Server via FTP....................................................................................... 803 Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Server via TFTP.....................................................................................804 Copy a Binary File to the Startup-Configuration...............................
Example of Deriving the Interface Index Number......................................................................................................... 833 MIB Objects for Viewing the System Image on Flash Partitions...........................................................................833 Monitoring BGP sessions via SNMP...............................................................................................................................833 Monitor Port-Channels.................................
Protocol Overview...................................................................................................................................................... 864 Configure the Network Time Protocol..................................................................................................................... 864 Enabling NTP...............................................................................................................................................................
Enabling Null VLAN as the Default VLAN...................................................................................................................... 890 59 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT)...................................................................................................... 891 Overview............................................................................................................................................................................. 891 VLT Terminology.............
60 VLT Proxy Gateway.................................................................................................................953 Proxy Gateway in VLT Domains......................................................................................................................................953 LLDP VLT Proxy Gateway in a Square VLT Topology........................................................................................... 956 Configuring a Static VLT Proxy Gateway............................
Loading VRF CAM.......................................................................................................................................................997 Creating a Non-Default VRF Instance...................................................................................................................... 997 Assigning an Interface to a VRF................................................................................................................................
65 Standards Compliance...........................................................................................................1050 IEEE Compliance..............................................................................................................................................................1050 RFC and I-D Compliance.................................................................................................................................................
1 About this Guide This guide describes the protocols and features the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) supports and provides configuration instructions and examples for implementing them. For complete information about all the CLI commands, see the Dell EMC Command Line Reference Guide for your system. The S6100–ON platform is available with Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.10(0.0) and beyond. Though this guide contains information about protocols, it is not intended to be a complete reference.
2 Configuration Fundamentals The Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols. The CLI is largely the same for each platform except for some commands and command outputs. The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes. Different sets of commands are available in each mode, and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels.
• EXEC Privilege mode has commands to view configurations, clear counters, manage configuration files, run diagnostics, and enable or disable debug operations. The privilege level is 15, which is unrestricted. You can configure a password for this mode; refer to the Configure the Enable Password section in the Getting Started chapter.
GRUB ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFV3 ROUTER RIP SPANNING TREE TRACE-LIST VLT DOMAIN VRRP UPLINK STATE GROUP Navigating CLI Modes The Dell EMC Networking OS prompt changes to indicate the CLI mode. The following table lists the CLI mode, its prompt, and information about how to access and exit the CLI mode. Move linearly through the command modes, except for the end command which takes you directly to EXEC Privilege mode and the exit command which moves you up one command mode level.
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command VLAN Interface DellEMC(conf-if-vl-1)# interface (INTERFACE modes) STANDARD ACCESS-LIST DellEMC(config-std-nacl)# ip access-list standard (IP ACCESS-LIST Modes) EXTENDED ACCESS-LIST DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)# ip access-list extended (IP ACCESS-LIST Modes) IP COMMUNITY-LIST DellEMC(config-community-list)# ip community-list CONSOLE DellEMC(config-line-console)# line (LINE Modes) VIRTUAL TERMINAL DellEMC(config-line-vty)# line (LINE Modes) STANDARD ACCES
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command LINE DellEMC(config-line-console) or DellEMC(config-line-vty) line console orline vty MONITOR SESSION DellEMC(conf-mon-sesssessionID)# monitor session OPENFLOW INSTANCE DellEMC(conf-of-instance-ofid)# openflow of-instance PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP DellEMC(conf-po-failover-grp)# port-channel failover-group PRIORITY GROUP DellEMC(conf-pg)# priority-group PROTOCOL GVRP DellEMC(config-gvrp)# protocol gvrp QOS POLICY DellEMC(conf-qos-policy-outets)#
1 2 up AC up 12112 -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan1 Speed ------------------------------------1 1 up up 7620 1 2 up up 7680 1 3 up up 7591 1 4 up up 7620 Speed in RPM Undoing Commands When you enter a command, the command line is added to the running configuration file (running-config). To disable a command and remove it from the running-config, enter the no command, then the original command.
Entering and Editing Commands Notes for entering commands. • • The CLI is not case-sensitive. You can enter partial CLI keywords. • • • • • Enter the minimum number of letters to uniquely identify a command. For example, you cannot enter cl as a partial keyword because both the clock and class-map commands begin with the letters “cl.” You can enter clo, however, as a partial keyword because only one command begins with those three letters. The TAB key auto-completes keywords in commands.
Filtering show Command Outputs Filter the output of a show command to display specific information by adding | [except | find | grep | no-more | save] specified_text after the command. The variable specified_text is the text for which you are filtering and it IS case sensitive unless you use the ignore-case suboption. Starting with Dell EMC Networking OS version 7.8.1.0, the grep command accepts an ignore-case sub-option that forces the search to case-insensitive.
Multiple Users in Configuration Mode Dell EMC Networking OS notifies all users when there are multiple users logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. A warning message indicates the username, type of connection (console or VTY), and in the case of a VTY connection, the IP address of the terminal on which the connection was established.
Total Alias Configured : 4 ----------------------------------------------------------------NOTE: The alias definition displays upto 40 characters and you can view the detailed list of definitions using the details option. 2. Display the details of all the aliases that are configured on the system.
3 Getting Started This chapter describes how you start configuring your system. When you power up the chassis, the system performs a power-on self test (POST) and system then loads the Dell EMC Networking Operating System. Boot messages scroll up the terminal window during this process. No user interaction is required if the boot process proceeds without interruption. When the boot process completes, the system status LEDs remain online (green) and the console monitor displays the EXEC mode prompt.
Accessing the Console Port To access the console port, follow these steps: For the console port pinout, refer to Accessing the RJ-45 Console Port with a DB-9 Adapter. 1. Install an RJ-45 copper cable into the console port. Use a rollover (crossover) cable to connect the console port to a terminal server. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the DTE terminal server. 3.
4. Power on the system. 5. Install the necessary USB device drivers. (To download the drivers, go to https://www.dell.com/support.) For assistance, contact Dell EMC Networking Technical Support. 6. Open your terminal software emulation program to access the system. 7.
3. Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown Configure a Management Route Define a path from the system to the network from which you are accessing the system remotely. Management routes are separate from IP routes and are only used to manage the system through the management port. To configure a management route, use the following command. • Configure a management route to the network from which you are accessing the system.
Configuring the Enable Password Access EXEC Privilege mode using the enable command. EXEC Privilege mode is unrestricted by default. Configure a password as a basic security measure. There are three types of enable passwords: • • • enable password is stored in the running/startup configuration using a DES encryption method. enable secret is stored in the running/startup configuration using MD5 encryption method.
• • • You may not copy a file from one location to the same location. When copying to a server, you can only use a hostname if a domain name server (DNS) server is configured. The usbflash command is supported on the device. Refer to your system’s Release Notes for a list of approved USB vendors. Example of Copying a File to an FTP Server DellEMC#copy flash://FTOS-S6100-ON-9.10.0.0.bin ftp://myusername:mypassword@192.168.1.1/ file_path/FTOS-S6100-ON-9.10.0.0.
DellEMC#copy ftp://10.16.127.35 nfsmount: Source file name []: test.c User name to login remote host: username Example of Logging in to Copy from NFS Mount DellEMC#copy nfsmount:///test flash: Destination file name [test]: test2 ! 5592 bytes successfully copied DellEMC# DellEMC#copy nfsmount:///test.txt ftp://10.16.127.35 Destination file name [test.txt]: User name to login remote host: username Password to login remote host: ! Example of Copying to NFS Mount DellEMC#copy flash://test.
NOTE: When you load the startup configuration or a configuration file from a network server such as TFTP to the running configuration, the configuration is added to the running configuration. This does not replace the existing running configuration. Commands in the configuration file has precedence over commands in the running configuration.
boot system stack-unit 1 default system: A: boot system gateway 10.16.200.254 Managing the File System The Dell EMC Networking system can use the internal Flash, external Flash, or remote devices to store files. The system stores files on the internal Flash by default but can be configured to store files elsewhere. To view file system information, use the following command. • View information about each file system.
[May 17 15:41:50]: CMD-(CLI):[no shutdown]by default from console [May 17 15:42:42]: CMD-(CLI):[show clock]by default from console [May 17 15:42:52]: CMD-(CLI):[write memory]by default from console - Repeated 1 time.
Upgrading Dell EMC Networking OS To upgrade Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS), refer to the Release Notes for the version you want to load on the system. You can download the release notes of your platform at https://www.force10networks.com. Use your login ID to log in to the website. Using HTTP for File Transfers Stating with Release 9.3(0.1), you can use HTTP to copy files or configuration details to a remote server.
4. Compare the generated hash value to the expected hash value published on the iSupport page. To validate the software image on the flash drive after the image is transferred to the system, but before you install the image, use the verify {md5 | sha256} [ flash://]img-file [hash-value] command in EXEC mode. • • • • • md5: MD5 message-digest algorithm sha256: SHA256 Secure Hash Algorithm flash: (Optional) Specifies the flash drive. The default uses the flash drive. You can enter the image file name.
4 Management This chapter describes the different protocols or services used to manage the Dell EMC Networking system.
Removing a Command from EXEC Mode To remove a command from the list of available commands in EXEC mode for a specific privilege level, use the privilege exec command from CONFIGURATION mode. In the command, specify a level greater than the level given to a user or terminal line, then the first keyword of each command you wish to restrict.
CONFIGURATION mode privilege {configure |interface | line | route-map | router} level level {command ||...|| command} DellEMC#show running-config privilege ! privilege exec level 3 configure privilege exec level 4 resequence privilege configure level 3 line privilege configure level 3 interface tengigabitethernet DellEMC#telnet 10.11.80.
Configuring Logging The Dell EMC Networking OS tracks changes in the system using event and error messages. By default, Dell EMC Networking OS logs these messages on: • • • the internal buffer console and terminal lines any configured syslog servers To disable logging, use the following commands. • Disable all logging except on the console. • CONFIGURATION mode no logging on Disable logging to the logging buffer. • CONFIGURATION mode no logging buffer Disable logging to terminal lines.
• • • • • Only the system administrator user role can execute this command. The system administrator and system security administrator user roles can view security events and system events. The system administrator user roles can view audit, security, and system events. Only the system administrator and security administrator user roles can view security logs. The network administrator and network operator user roles can view system events.
Setting Up a Secure Connection to a Syslog Server You can use reverse tunneling with the port forwarding to securely connect to a syslog server. Figure 2. Setting Up a Secure Connection to a Syslog Server Pre-requisites To configure a secure connection from the switch to the syslog server: 1. On the switch, enable the SSH server DellEMC(conf)#ip ssh server enable 2.
Log Messages in the Internal Buffer All error messages, except those beginning with %BOOTUP (Message), are log in the internal buffer.
Track Login Activity Dell EMC Networking OS enables you to track the login activity of users and view the successful and unsuccessful login events. When you log in using the console or VTY line, the system displays the last successful login details of the current user and the number of unsuccessful login attempts since your last successful login to the system, and whether the current user’s permissions have changed since the last login.
Example of the show login statistics all command The show login statistics all command displays the successful and failed login details of all users in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period. DellEMC#show login statistics all -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 08:54:28 UTC Wed Mar 23 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
The following is sample output of the show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts user login-id command. DellEMC# show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts user admin There were 3 unsuccessful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 12 day(s). The following is sample output of the show login statistics successful-attempts command. DellEMC#show login statistics successful-attempts There were 4 successful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 30 day(s).
session, the system does not allow any attempt to login since maximum concurrent sessions have reached even though more VTY lines are available. You are allowed to login as a different user as more VTY lines are available. The following example enables you to clear your existing login sessions.
• logging buffered level Specify the minimum severity level for logging to the console. • CONFIGURATION mode logging console level Specify the minimum severity level for logging to terminal lines. • CONFIGURATION mode logging monitor level Specify the minimum severity level for logging to a syslog server. • CONFIGURATION mode logging trap level Specify the minimum severity level for logging to the syslog history table.
Configuring a UNIX Logging Facility Level You can save system log messages with a UNIX system logging facility. To configure a UNIX logging facility level, use the following command. • Specify one of the following parameters.
Configure the following parameters for the virtual terminal lines: • • number: the range is from zero (0) to 8. end-number: the range is from 1 to 8. You can configure multiple virtual terminals at one time by entering a number and an end-number. 2. Configure a level and set the maximum number of messages to print. LINE mode logging synchronous [level severity-level | all] [limit] Configure the following optional parameters: • • level severity-level: the range is from 0 to 7. The default is 2.
Monitor logging: level debugging Buffer logging: level debugging, 7 Messages Logged, Size (40960 bytes) Trap logging: level informational Last logging buffer cleared: May 17 15:38:38 May 17 15:43:08 %STKUNIT1-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console May 17 15:42:52 %STKUNIT1-M:CP %FILEMGR-5-FILESAVED: Copied running-config in flash by default May 17 15:41:53 %STKUNIT1-M:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Changed interface state May 17 15:41:50 %STKUNIT1-M:CP %IFMGR-5-ASTATE_UP: Changed interface Admin 1/1/5 May 17
[1d0h25m]: [1d0h25m]: [1d0h25m]: [1d0h25m]: [1d0h25m]: CMD-(CLI):[write memory]by default from console Repeated 1 time.
these changes are backward-compatible and do not affect existing behavior; meaning, you can still use the source-interface command to communicate with a particular interface even if no VRF is configured on that interface. For more information about FTP, refer to RFC 959, File Transfer Protocol. NOTE: To transmit large files, Dell EMC Networking recommends configuring the switch as an FTP server.
• • • • • • • For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information. For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the stack/slot/port[/subport] information. For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information. For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the stack/slot/port information.
DellEMC(config-line-vty)#show config line vty 0 access-class myvtyacl DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl)#do show run acl ! ip access-list extended testdeny seq 10 deny ip 30.1.1.
DellEMC(config-line-vty)#password myvtypassword DellEMC(config-line-vty)#show config line vty 0 password myvtypassword login authentication myvtymethodlist line vty 1 password myvtypassword login authentication myvtymethodlist line vty 2 password myvtypassword login authentication myvtymethodlist DellEMC(config-line-vty)# Setting Timeout for EXEC Privilege Mode EXEC timeout is a basic security feature that returns Dell EMC Networking OS to EXEC mode after a period of inactivity on the terminal lines.
Exit character is '^]'. FreeBSD/i386 (freebsd2.force10networks.com) (ttyp1) login: admin DellEMC# Lock CONFIGURATION Mode Dell EMC Networking OS allows multiple users to make configurations at the same time. You can lock CONFIGURATION mode so that only one user can be in CONFIGURATION mode at any time (Message 2). You can set two types of lockst: auto and manual. • • Set auto-lock using the configuration mode exclusive auto command from CONFIGURATION mode.
3. System Status LED changes to an alarm state, blinking amber for S3048–ON, S6100–ON and Z9100–ON, and solid amber for C9000. It is not possible to suppress this LED pattern until the unit is switched off (for RMA). 4. The switch (control/management/data plane) continues to be active. NOTE: This is true even if the unit is the master (in a HA chassis environment – as in the case of RPM) or a Stack master or standby (as in case of S3048-ON).
Restoring Factory Default Environment Variables The Boot line determines the location of the image that is used to boot up the chassis after restoring factory default settings. Ideally, these locations contain valid images, using which the chassis boots up. When you restore factory-default settings, you can either use a flash boot procedure or a network boot procedure to boot the switch.
7. Reload the system. BOOT_USER # reload Reloading the system You can reload the system using the reload command. To reload the system, follow these steps: • Reload the system into Dell EMC Networking OS. • EXEC Privilege mode reload Reload the system if a configuration change to the NVRAM requires a device reload. • EXEC Privilege mode reload conditional nvram-cfg-change Reload the system into the Dell diagnostics mode. • EXEC Privilege mode reload dell-diag Reload the system into the ONIE mode.
Enter the stack-unit keyword and the keyword all to view the reason for the last system reboot of all stack units in the stack.
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. A device connected to a port that is enabled with 802.1X is disallowed from sending or receiving packets on the network until its identity is verified (through a username and password, for example). 802.
• • • The device attempting to access the network is the supplicant. The supplicant is not allowed to communicate on the network until the authenticator authorizes the port. It can only communicate with the authenticator in response to 802.1X requests. The device with which the supplicant communicates is the authenticator. The authenticator is the gate keeper of the network. It translates and forwards requests and responses between the authentication server and the supplicant.
Figure 5. EAP Port-Authentication EAP over RADIUS 802.1X uses RADIUS to shuttle EAP packets between the authenticator and the authentication server, as defined in RFC 3579. EAP messages are encapsulated in RADIUS packets as a type of attribute in Type, Length, Value (TLV) format. The Type value for EAP messages is 79. Figure 6. EAP Over RADIUS RADIUS Attributes for 802.1X Support Dell EMC Networking systems include the following RADIUS attributes in all 802.
Related Configuration Tasks • • • • • • Configuring Request Identity Re-Transmissions Forcibly Authorizing or Unauthorizing a Port Re-Authenticating a Port Configuring Timeouts Configuring a Guest VLAN Configuring an Authentication-Fail VLAN Important Points to Remember • • • • • Dell EMC Networking OS supports 802.1X with EAP-MD5, EAP-OTP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAPv0, PEAPv1, and MS-CHAPv2 with PEAP. All platforms support only RADIUS as the authentication server.
1. Enable 802.1X globally. CONFIGURATION mode dot1x authentication 2. Enter INTERFACE mode on an interface or a range of interfaces. INTERFACE mode interface [range] 3. Enable 802.1X on the supplicant interface only. INTERFACE mode dot1x authentication Verify that 802.1X is enabled globally and at the interface level using the show running-config | find dot1x command from EXEC Privilege mode. In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled.
CONFIGURATION mode dot1x profile {profile-name} profile—name — Enter the dot1x profile name. The profile name length is limited to 32 characters. DellEMC(conf)#dot1x profile test DellEMC(conf-dot1x-profile)# DellEMC#show dot1x profile 802.1x profile information ----------------------------Dot1x Profile test Profile MACs 00:00:00:00:01:11 Configuring MAC addresses for a do1x Profile To configure a list of MAC addresses for a dot1x profile, use the mac command. You can configure 1 to 6 MAC addresses.
Port Auth Status: Re-Authentication: Untagged VLAN id: Guest VLAN: Guest VLAN id: Auth-Fail VLAN: Auth-Fail VLAN id: Auth-Fail Max-Attempts:3 Critical VLAN: Critical VLAN id: Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Static-MAB: Static-MAB Profile: Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: AUTHORIZED(STATIC-MAB) Disable None Enable 100 Enable 200 Enable 300 Disable Enable Sample 90 seconds 120 seconds 10 30 seconds 30 secon
Host Mode: Auth PAE State: Backend State: SINGLE_HOST Authenticated Idle Configuring Request Identity Re-Transmissions When the authenticator sends a Request Identity frame and the supplicant does not respond, the authenticator waits for 30 seconds and then re-transmits the frame. The amount of time that the authenticator waits before re-transmitting and the maximum number of times that the authenticator retransmits can be configured.
Tx Period: 90 seconds Quiet Period: 120 seconds ReAuth Max: 2 Supplicant Timeout: 30 seconds Server Timeout: 30 seconds Re-Auth Interval: 3600 seconds Max-EAP-Req: 10 Auth Type: SINGLE_HOST Auth PAE State: Initialize Backend State: Initialize Configuring a Quiet Period after a Failed Authentication If the supplicant fails the authentication process, the authenticator sends another Request Identity frame after 30 seconds by default. You can configure this period.
• • ForceUnauthorized — an unauthorized state. A device connected to a port in this state is never subjected to the authentication process and is not allowed to communicate on the network. Placing the port in this state is the same as shutting down the port. Any attempt by the supplicant to initiate authentication is ignored. Auto — an unauthorized state by default. A device connected to this port in this state is subjected to the authentication process.
DellEMC(conf-if-Te-1/1/1/1)#do show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 802.
Figure 8. Dynamic VLAN Assignment 1. Configure 8021.x globally (refer to Enabling 802.1X) along with relevant RADIUS server configurations (refer to the illustration inDynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication). 2. Make the interface a switchport so that it can be assigned to a VLAN. 3. Create the VLAN to which the interface will be assigned. 4. Connect the supplicant to the port configured for 802.1X. 5.
Configuring a Guest VLAN If the supplicant does not respond within a determined amount of time ([reauth-max + 1] * tx-period, the system assumes that the host does not have 802.1X capability and the port is placed in the Guest VLAN. NOTE: For more information about configuring timeouts, refer to Configuring Timeouts. Configure a port to be placed in the Guest VLAN after failing to respond within the timeout period using the dot1x guest-vlan command from INTERFACE mode.
Re-Authentication: Untagged VLAN id: Guest VLAN: Disabled Guest VLAN id: 200 Auth-Fail VLAN: Disabled Auth-Fail VLAN id: 100 Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: 5 Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Auth Type: Disable None Auth PAE State: Backend State: Initialize Initialize 90 seconds 120 seconds 10 15 seconds 15 seconds 7200 seconds 10 SINGLE_HOST Configuring Timeouts If the supplicant or the authentication server is unresponsive, the authentica
Auth PAE State: Backend State: Initialize Initialize Enter the tasks the user should do after finishing this task (optional). Multi-Host Authentication By default, 802.1x assumes that a single end user is connected to a single authenticator port in a one-to-one mode of authentication called single-host mode. If multiple end users are connected to the same port, a many-to-one configuration, only the first end user to respond to the identity request is authenticated.
Figure 10. Multi-Host Authentication Mode When you configure multi-host mode authentication, the first client to respond to an identity request is authenticated and subsequent responses are still ignored. However, because the authenticator expects the possibility of multiple responses, no system log is generated. After the first supplicant is authenticated, all end users connected to the authorized port are allowed to access the network.
Auth-Fail VLAN id: Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: Critical VLAN: Critical VLAN id: Mac-Auth-Bypass: Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Static-MAB: Static-MAB Profile: Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Host Mode: Auth PAE State: Backend State: NONE NONE Disable NONE Disable Disable Disable NONE 30 seconds 60 seconds 2 30 seconds 30 seconds 3600 seconds 2 MULTI_HOST Connecting Idle Configuring Single-Host Authentication To enable single-host authentication o
During the authentication process, the switch is able to learn the MAC address of the device though the EAPoL frames, and the VLAN assignment from the RADIUS server. With this information it creates an authorized-MAC-to-VLAN mapping table per port. Then, the system can tag all incoming untagged frames with the appropriate VLAN-ID based on the table entries.
MAC Authentication Bypass MAC authentication bypass (MAB) enables you to provide MAC-based security by allowing only known MAC addresses within the network using a RADIUS server. 802.1X-enabled clients can authenticate themselves using the 802.1X protocol. Other devices that do not use 802.1X — like IP phones, printers, and IP fax machines — still need connectivity to the network. The guest VLAN provides one way to access the network.
• • • • Attribute 5—NAS -Port: The port number of the interface being authorized entered as an integer. Attribute 30—Called-Station-Id: MAC address of the ingress interfaces of the authenticator. Attribute 31—Calling-Station-Id: MAC address of the 802.1X supplicant. Attribute 87—NAS-Port-Id: The name of the interface being authorized entered as a string. NOTE: Only attributes 1 and 2 are used for MAB; Attributes 30 and 31 are not mandatory in the MAB method. 2.
You can use dynamic CoS with 802.1X is when the traffic from a server should be classified based on the application that it is running. A static dot1p priority configuration applied from the switch is not sufficient in this case, as the server application might change. You would instead need to push the CoS configuration to the switches based on the application the server is running. Dynamic CoS uses RADIUS attribute 59, called User-Priority-Table, to specify the priority value for incoming frames.
6 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) Optimizing CAM Utilization During the Attachment of ACLs to VLANs To minimize the number of entries in CAM, enable and configure the ACL CAM feature. Use this feature when you apply ACLs to a VLAN (or a set of VLANs) and when you apply ACLs to a set of ports. The ACL CAM feature allows you to effectively use the Layer 3 CAM space with VLANs and Layer 2 and Layer 3 CAM space with ports.
• • • • • • • The maximum number of members in an ACL VLAN group is determined by the type of switch and its hardware capabilities. This scaling limit depends on the number of slices that are allocated for ACL CAM optimization. If one slice is allocated, the maximum number of VLAN members is 256 for all ACL VLAN groups. If two slices are allocated, the maximum number of VLAN members is 512 for all ACL VLAN groups.
1,1000 DellEMC# Configuring FP Blocks for VLAN Parameters To allocate the number of FP blocks for the various VLAN processes on the system, use the cam-acl-vlan command. To reset the number of FP blocks to the default, use the no version of this command. By default, 0 groups are allocated for the ACL in VLAN contentaware processor (VCAP). ACL VLAN groups or CAM optimization is not enabled by default. You also must allocate the slices for CAM optimization. 1.
| | IN-L3 FIB | | IN-V6 ACL | | IN-NLB ACL | | IPMAC ACL | | OUT-L2 ACL | | OUT-L3 ACL | | OUT-V6 ACL Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%.
Allocating FP Blocks for VLAN Processes The VLAN contentaware processor (VCAP) application is a pre-ingress CAP that modifies the VLAN settings before packets are forwarded. To support ACL CAM optimization, the CAM carving feature is enhanced. A total of four VCAP groups are present: two fixed groups and two dynamic groups. Of the two dynamic groups, you can allocate zero, one, or two FP blocks to iSCSI Counters, Open Flow, and ACL Optimization. You can configure only two of these features at a time.
After the system reloads, the Dell Networking OS enables the feature. DellEMC(conf)#feature acloptimized Configuration change will be in effect after save and reload. ACL config containing TTL, layer3 and VRF conflicts with ACL Cam optimzation feature and these keywords would be discarded while applying the ACL.
7 Access Control Lists (ACLs) This chapter describes access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps. At their simplest, access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps permit or deny traffic based on MAC and/or IP addresses. This chapter describes implementing IP ACLs, IP prefix lists and route-maps. For MAC ACLS, refer to Layer 2.
• • • • • • • Applying an IP ACL Configure Ingress ACLs Configure Egress ACLs IP Prefix Lists ACL Remarks ACL Resequencing Route Maps IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) In Dell EMC Networking switch/routers, you can create two different types of IP ACLs: standard or extended. A standard ACL filters packets based on the source IP packet.
Test CAM Usage This command applies to both IPv4 and IPv6 CAM profiles, but is best used when verifying QoS optimization for IPv6 ACLs. To determine whether sufficient ACL CAM space is available to enable a service-policy, use this command. To verify the actual CAM space required, create a class map with all the required ACL rules, then execute the test cam-usage command in Privilege mode. The following example shows the output when executing this command.
ACLs acl1 and acl2 have overlapping rules because the address range 20.1.1.0/24 is within 20.0.0.0/8. Therefore (without the keyword order), packets within the range 20.1.1.0/24 match positive against cmap1 and are buffered in queue 7, though you intended for these packets to match positive against cmap2 and be buffered in queue 4. In cases where class-maps with overlapping ACL rules are applied to different queues, use the order keyword to specify the order in which you want to apply ACL rules.
THRESHOLD THRESHOLD -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 dport1 l4dstport No 80 89 0 2 dport2 l4dstport No 3000 3500 2 3 dportgt5000 l4dstport No 5001 65535 1 4 ip-mtu-782 mtu No 782 782 1 5 sport1 l4srcport No 1024 65535 1 6 sportinv1 l4srcport Yes 2500 2500 1 DellEMC# show aclrange access-list Profile-name type Acl-name seqno -----------------------------------------abc v4 abc 5 V4 zyx 10 V6 def 8 bgp V6 ghi 8 Important Points to Remember • For route-map
route-map dilling permit 10 DellEMC(config-route-map)# You can create multiple instances of this route map by using the sequence number option to place the route maps in the correct order. Dell EMC Networking OS processes the route maps with the lowest sequence number first. When a configured route map is applied to a command, such as redistribute, traffic passes through all instances of that route map until a match is found. The following is an example with two instances of a route map.
DellEMC(config-route-map)#match tag 2000 DellEMC(config-route-map)#match tag 3000 In the next example, there is a match only if a route has both of the specified characteristics. In this example, there a match only if the route has a tag value of 1000 and a metric value of 2000. Also, if there are different instances of the same route-map, then it’s sufficient if a permit match happens in any instance of that routemap.
• match ip next-hop {access-list-name | prefix-list prefix-list-name} Match next-hop routes specified in a prefix list (IPv6). • CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match ipv6 next-hop {access-list-name | prefix-list prefix-list-name} Match source routes specified in a prefix list (IPv4). • CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match ip route-source {access-list-name | prefix-list prefix-list-name} Match source routes specified in a prefix list (IPv6).
• Assign an ORIGIN attribute. • CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set origin {egp | igp | incomplete} Specify a tag for the redistributed routes. • CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set tag tag-value Specify a value as the route’s weight. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set weight value To create route map instances, use these commands. There is no limit to the number of set commands per route map, but the convention is to keep the number of set filters in a route map low. Set commands do not require a corresponding match command.
Continue Clause Normally, when a match is found, set clauses are executed, and the packet is then forwarded; no more route-map modules are processed. If you configure the continue command at the end of a module, the next module (or a specified module) is processed even after a match is found. The following example shows a continue clause at the end of a route-map module. In this example, if a match is found in the route-map “test” module 10, module 30 is processed.
Layer 4 ACL Rules Examples The following examples show the ACL commands for Layer 4 packet filtering. Permit an ACL line with L3 information only, and the fragments keyword is present: If a packet’s L3 information matches the L3 information in the ACL line, the packet's FO is checked. • • If a packet's FO > 0, the packet is permitted. If a packet's FO = 0, the next ACL entry is processed.
seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [count [byte] [dscp] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] NOTE: When assigning sequence numbers to filters, keep in mind that you might need to insert a new filter. To prevent reconfiguring multiple filters, assign sequence numbers in multiples of five. To view the rules of a particular ACL configured on a particular interface, use the show ip accounting access-list ACL-name interface interface command in EXEC Privilege mode.
seq 5 permit 10.1.0.0/16 monitor 177 DellEMC(config-std-nacl)# To view all configured IP ACLs, use the show ip accounting access-list command in EXEC Privilege mode. The following examples shows how to view a standard ACL filter sequence for an interface.
Configure Filters, ICMP Packets To create a filter for ICMP packets with a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1. Create either an extended IPv4 or IPv6 ACL and assign it a unique name. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended access-list-name ipv6 access-list extended access-list-name 2. Configure an extended IP ACL filter for ICMP packets.
seq seq seq seq seq seq 20 25 30 35 40 45 permit permit permit permit permit permit icmp icmp icmp icmp icmp icmp any any any any any any any any any any any any nd-na count (56 packets) packet-too-big count (25 packets) parameter-problem count (34 packets) time-exceeded count (56 packets) dest-unreachable count (43 packets) port-unreachable count (25 packets) Configure Filters, TCP Packets To create a filter for TCP packets with a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1.
CONFIG-EXT-NACL mode {deny | permit} tcp {source mask] | any | host ip-address}} [count [byte]] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] Configure a deny or permit filter to examine UDP packets. • CONFIG-EXT-NACL mode {deny | permit} udp {source mask | any | host ip-address}} [count [byte]] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] When you use the log keyword, the CP logs details about the packets that match.
Assign an IP ACL to an Interface To pass traffic through a configured IP ACL, assign that ACL to a physical interface, a port channel interface, or a VLAN. The IP ACL is applied to all traffic entering a physical or port channel interface and the traffic is either forwarded or dropped depending on the criteria and actions specified in the ACL. The same ACL may be applied to different interfaces and that changes its functionality.
Configure Ingress ACLs Ingress ACLs are applied to interfaces and to traffic entering the system. These system-wide ACLs eliminate the need to apply ACLs onto each interface and achieves the same results. By localizing target traffic, it is a simpler implementation. To create an ingress ACL, use the ip access-group command in EXEC Privilege mode. The example shows applying the ACL, rules to the newly created access group, and viewing the access list.
DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#deny icmp any any DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#permit 1.1.1.2 DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)#end DellEMC#show ip accounting access-list ! Extended Ingress IP access list abcd on gigethernet 0/0 seq 5 permit tcp any any seq 10 deny icmp any any seq 15 permit 1.1.1.
• • To deny routes with a mask less than /24, enter deny x.x.x.x/x le 24. To permit routes with a mask greater than /20, enter permit x.x.x.x/x ge 20. The following rules apply to prefix lists: • • A prefix list without any permit or deny filters allows all routes. An “implicit deny” is assumed (that is, the route is dropped) for all route prefixes that do not match a permit or deny filter in a configured prefix list. After a route matches a filter, the filter’s action is applied.
NOTE: The last line in the prefix list Juba contains a “permit all” statement. By including this line in a prefix list, you specify that all routes not matching any criteria in the prefix list are forwarded. To delete a filter, use the no seq sequence-number command in PREFIX LIST mode.If you are creating a standard prefix list with only one or two filters, you can let Dell EMC Networking OS assign a sequence number based on the order in which the filters are configured.
The following example shows the show ip prefix-list summary command. DellEMC> DellEMC>show ip prefix summary Prefix-list with the last deletion/insertion: filter_ospf ip prefix-list filter_in: count: 3, range entries: 3, sequences: 5 - 10 ip prefix-list filter_ospf: count: 4, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 10 DellEMC> Applying a Prefix List for Route Redistribution To pass traffic through a configured prefix list, use the prefix list in a route redistribution command.
To view the configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER OSPF mode, or the show running-config ospf command in EXEC mode. DellEMC(conf-router_ospf)#show config ! router ospf 34 network 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.255 area 0.0.0.1 distribute-list prefix awe in DellEMC(conf-router_ospf)# ACL Remarks While defining ACL rules, you can optionally include a remark to make the ACLs more descriptive. You can include a remark with a maximum of 80 characters in length.
The remark number is optional. The following is an example of removing a remark.
resequence prefix-list {ipv4 | ipv6} {prefix-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-to-Increment} Remarks and rules that originally have the same sequence number have the same sequence number after you apply the resequence command. The example shows the resequencing of an IPv4 access-list beginning with the number 2 and incrementing by 2. DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)# show config ! ip access-list extended test remark 4 XYZ remark 5 this remark corresponds to permit any host 1.1.1.1 seq 5 permit ip any host 1.1.1.
Implementation Information ACLs and prefix lists can only drop or forward the packet or traffic. Route maps process routes for route redistribution. For example, a route map can be called to filter only specific routes and to add a metric. Route maps also have an “implicit deny.” Unlike ACLs and prefix lists; however, where the packet or traffic is dropped, in route maps, if a route does not match any of the route map conditions, the route is not redistributed.
8 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) BFD is a protocol that is used to rapidly detect communication failures between two adjacent systems. It is a simple and lightweight replacement for existing routing protocol link state detection mechanisms. It also provides a failure detection solution for links on which no routing protocol is used. BFD is a simple hello mechanism. Two neighboring systems running BFD establish a session using a three-way handshake.
BFD Packet Format Control packets are encapsulated in user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. The following illustration shows the complete encapsulation of a BFD control packet inside an IPv4 packet. Figure 11. BFD in IPv4 Packet Format Field Description Diagnostic Code The reason that the last session failed. State The current local session state. Refer to BFD Sessions. Flag A bit that indicates packet function.
Field Description Your Discriminator A random number generated by the remote system to identify the session. Discriminator values are necessary to identify the session to which a control packet belongs because there can be many sessions running on a single interface. Desired Min TX Interval The minimum rate at which the local system would like to send control packets to the remote system.
State Description Up Both systems are exchanging control packets. The session is declared down if: • • • A control packet is not received within the detection time. Sufficient echo packets are lost. Demand mode is active and a control packet is not received in response to a poll packet. BFD Three-Way Handshake A three-way handshake must take place between the systems that participate in the BFD session.
Session State Changes The following illustration shows how the session state on a system changes based on the status notification it receives from the remote system. For example, if a session on a system is down and it receives a Down status notification from the remote system, the session state on the local system changes to Init. Figure 13.
• Configuring Protocol Liveness Configure BFD for Physical Ports Configuring BFD for physical ports is supported on the C-Series and E-Series platforms only. BFD on physical ports is useful when you do not enable the routing protocol. Without BFD, if the remote system fails, the local system does not remove the connected route until the first failed attempt to send a packet.
CONFIGURATION mode interface 2. Assign an IP address to the interface if one is not already assigned. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address 3. Identify the neighbor that the interface participates with the BFD session. INTERFACE mode bfd neighbor ip-address To verify that the session is established, use the show bfd neighbors command. The bold line shows the BFD session.
Example of Viewing Session Parameters R1(conf-if-te-1/1/4/1)#bfd interval 100 min_rx 100 multiplier 4 role passive R1(conf-if-te-1/1/4/1)#do show bfd neighbors detail Session Discriminator: 1 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 2.2.2.1 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:09:c3:e5 Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
Establishing Sessions for Static Routes for Default VRF Sessions are established for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route on the default VRF. Figure 15. Establishing Sessions for Static Routes To establish a BFD session, use the following command. • Establish BFD sessions for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route.
ip route bfd vrf vrf2 ip route bfd vrf vrf1 prefix-list p4_le The following example shows that sessions are created for static routes for the default VRF. Dell#show bfd neighbors * Ad Dn B C I O O3 R M V VT - Active session role Admin Down BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr * 11.1.1.1 RemoteAddr 11.1.1.2 Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients Te 1/1/1/1 Up 200 200 3 R * 21.1.1.1 21.1.1.2 Vl 100 Up 200 200 3 R * 31.1.1.1 31.1.1.
For more information on prefix lists, see IP Prefix Lists. To enable BFD sessions on specific neighbors, perform the following steps: Enter the following command to enable BFD session on specific next-hop neighbors: CONFIGURATION ip route bfd prefix-list prefix-list-name The BFD session is established for the next-hop neighbors that are specified in the prefix-list. • • • • • • • • • The absence of a prefix-list causes BFD sessions to be enabled on all the eligible next-hop neighbors.
Related Configuration Tasks • • Changing IPv6 Static Route Session Parameters Disabling BFD for Static Routes Establishing Sessions for IPv6 Static Routes for Default VRF Sessions are established for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route on the default VRF. To establish a BFD session, use the following command. • Establish BFD sessions for all IPv6 neighbors that are the next hop of a static route.
I O O3 R M V VT - ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr * 11::1 RemoteAddr 11::2 Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients Te 1/1/1/1 Up 200 200 3 R * 21::1 21::2 Vl 100 Up 200 200 3 R * 31::1 31::2 Vl 101 Up 200 200 3 R The following example shows that sessions are created for static routes for the nondefault VRFs.
Related Configuration Tasks • • Changing OSPF Session Parameters Disabling BFD for OSPF Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors for the Default VRF BFD sessions can be established with all OSPF neighbors at once or sessions can be established with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPF adjacency is in the Full state. Figure 16.
To view the established sessions, use the show bfd neighbors command. The bold line shows the OSPF BFD sessions. R2(conf-router_ospf)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_ospf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients * 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1/1 Up 100 100 3 O * 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.
* 7.1.1.1 7.1.1.2 Te 1/1/1/1 Up 200 200 3 O The following example shows the show bfd vrf neighbors command output showing the nondefault VRF. show bfd vrf VRF_blue neighbors * Ad Dn B C I O O3 R M V VT - Active session role Admin Down BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr * 5.1.1.1 RemoteAddr 5.1.1.2 Interface Po 30 State Rx-int Tx-int Mult VRF Clients Up 200 200 3 255 O * 6.1.1.1 6.1.1.2 Vl 30 Up 200 200 3 255 O * 7.1.1.1 7.1.1.
Delete session on Down: True VRF: VRF_blue Client Registered: OSPF Uptime: 00:00:15 Statistics: Number of packets received from neighbor: 78 Number of packets sent to neighbor: 78 Number of state changes: 1 Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 4 Session Discriminator: 6 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 7.1.1.1 Local MAC Addr: 00:a0:c9:00:00:02 Remote Addr: 7.1.1.
• no bfd all-neighbors Disable BFD sessions with all OSPF neighbors on an interface. INTERFACE mode ip ospf bfd all-neighbors disable Configure BFD for OSPFv3 BFD for OSPFv3 provides support for IPV6. Configuring BFD for OSPFv3 is a two-step process: 1. Enable BFD globally. 2. Establish sessions with OSPFv3 neighbors.
Establishing BFD Sessions with OSPFv3 Neighbors for nondefault VRFs To configure BFD in a nondefault VRF, use the following procedure: • Enable BFD globally. • CONFIGURATION mode bfd enable Establish sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors in a specific VRF. • ROUTER-OSPFv3 mode bfd all-neighbors Establish sessions with the OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface in a specific VRF.
* fe80::2a0:c9ff:fe00:2 511 O3 fe80::3617:98ff:fe34:12 Vl 102 Up 150 150 3 * fe80::2a0:c9ff:fe00:2 511 O3 DellEMC# fe80::3617:98ff:fe34:12 Vl 103 Up 150 150 3 Changing OSPFv3 Session Parameters Configure BFD sessions with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: desired tx interval, required min rx interval, detection multiplier, and system role. Configure these parameters for all OSPFv3 sessions or all OSPFv3 sessions on a particular interface.
Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all IS-IS neighbors at once or sessions can be established for all neighbors out of a specific interface. Figure 17. Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors To establish BFD with all IS-IS neighbors or with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all IS-IS neighbors. • ROUTER-ISIS mode bfd all-neighbors Establish sessions with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface.
Changing IS-IS Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. These parameters are configured for all IS-IS sessions or all IS-IS sessions out of an interface. If you change a parameter globally, the change affects all IS-IS neighbors sessions.
Figure 18. Establishing Sessions with BGP Neighbors The sample configuration shows alternative ways to establish a BFD session with a BGP neighbor: • • By establishing BFD sessions with all neighbors discovered by BGP (the bfd all-neighbors command). By establishing a BFD session with a specified BGP neighbor (the neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd command) BFD packets originating from a router are assigned to the highest priority egress queue to minimize transmission delays.
2. Specify the AS number and enter ROUTER BGP configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 3. Add a BGP neighbor or peer group in a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number 4. Enable the BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown 5. Add a BGP neighbor or peer group in a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number 6. Enable the BGP neighbor.
3. Specify the address family as IPv4. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name 4. Add an IPv4 BGP neighbor or peer group in a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP_ADDRESSFAMILY mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number 5. Enable the BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP_ADDRESSFAMILY mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown 6. Add an IPv6 BGP neighbor or peer group in a remote AS.
Disabling BFD for BGP You can disable BFD for BGP. To disable a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor, use the first command. To remove the disabled state of a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor, use the second command. The BGP link with the neighbor returns to normal operation and uses the BFD session parameters globally configured with the bfd allneighbors command or configured for the peer group to which the neighbor belongs. • Disable a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor.
* 2.2.2.3 * 3.3.3.3 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.2 Te 1/1/1/2 Te 1/1/1/3 Up Up 200 200 200 200 3 3 B B The following example shows viewing BFD neighbors with full detail. The bold lines show the BFD session parameters: TX (packet transmission), RX (packet reception), and multiplier (maximum number of missed packets). R2# show bfd neighbors detail Session Discriminator: 9 Neighbor Discriminator: 10 Local Addr: 1.1.1.3 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:66:da:33 Remote Addr: 1.1.1.
1.1.1.2 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.2 1 1 1 282 273 282 281 273 281 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (0) 0 00:38:12 04:32:26 00:38:12 0 0 0 The following example shows viewing BFD information for a specified neighbor. The bold lines show the message displayed when you enable a BFD session with different configurations: • • • Message displays when you enable a BFD session with a BGP neighbor that inherits the global BFD session settings configured with the global bfd all-neighbors command.
Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization ... Configure BFD for VRRP When using BFD with VRRP, the VRRP protocol registers with the BFD manager on the route processor module (RPM). BFD sessions are established with all neighboring interfaces participating in VRRP. If a neighboring interface fails, the BFD agent on the line card notifies the BFD manager, which in turn notifies the VRRP protocol that a link state change occurred. Configuring BFD for VRRP is a three-step process: 1. Enable BFD globally.
Establishing VRRP Sessions on VRRP Neighbors The master router does not care about the state of the backup router, so it does not participate in any VRRP BFD sessions. VRRP BFD sessions on the backup router cannot change to the UP state. Configure the master router to establish an individual VRRP session the backup router. To establish a session with a particular VRRP neighbor, use the following command. • Establish a session with a particular VRRP neighbor.
Disabling BFD for VRRP If you disable any or all VRRP sessions, the sessions are torn down. A final Admin Down control packet is sent to all neighbors and sessions on the remote system change to the Down state. To disable all VRRP sessions on an interface, sessions for a particular VRRP group, or for a particular VRRP session on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable all VRRP sessions on an interface. • INTERFACE mode no vrrp bfd all-neighbors Disable all VRRP sessions in a VRRP group.
9 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an interdomain routing protocol that manages routing between edge routers. BGP uses an algorithm to exchange routing information between switches enabled with BGP. BGP determines a path to reach a particular destination using certain attributes while avoiding routing loops. BGP selects a single path as the best path to a destination network or host. You can also influence BGP to select different path by altering some of the BGP attributes.
Figure 20. BGP Topology with autonomous systems (AS) BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing (CIDR) and aggregate routes and AS paths. BGP is a path vector protocol — a computer network in which BGP maintains the path that updated information takes as it diffuses through the network. Updates traveling through the network and returning to the same node are easily detected and discarded.
Figure 21. BGP Routers in Full Mesh The number of BGP speakers each BGP peer must maintain increases exponentially. Network management quickly becomes impossible. AS4 Number Representation Dell EMC Networking OS supports multiple representations of 4-byte AS numbers: asplain, asdot+, and asdot. NOTE: The ASDOT and ASDOT+ representations are supported only with the 4-Byte AS numbers feature. If 4-Byte AS numbers are not implemented, only ASPLAIN representation is supported.
• AS Numbers larger than 65535 is represented using ASDOT notation as .. For example: AS 65546 is represented as 1.10. ASDOT representation combines the ASPLAIN and ASDOT+ representations. AS numbers less than 65536 appear in integer format (asplain); AS numbers equal to or greater than 65536 appear in the decimal format (asdot+). For example, the AS number 65526 appears as 65526 and the AS number 65546 appears as 1.10.
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#no bgp four-octet-as-support DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#sho conf ! router bgp 100 neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip bgp BGP table version is 28093, local router ID is 172.30.1.57 Four-Byte AS Numbers You can use the 4-Byte (32-bit) format when configuring autonomous system numbers (ASNs). The 4-Byte support is advertised as a new BGP capability (4-BYTE-AS) in the OPEN message.
State Description If that transition is not successful, BGP resets the ConnectRetry timer and transitions to the Active state when the timer expires. Active The router resets the ConnectRetry timer to zero and returns to the Connect state. OpenSent After successful OpenSent transition, the router sends an Open message and waits for one in return. OpenConfirm After the Open message parameters are agreed between peers, the neighbor relation is established and is in the OpenConfirm state.
mode, Dell EMC Networking OS compares MED between the adjacent paths within an AS group because all paths in the AS group are from the same AS. NOTE: The bgp bestpath as-path multipath-relax command is disabled by default, preventing BGP from loadbalancing a learned route across two or more eBGP peers. To enable load-balancing across different eBGP peers, enable the bgp bestpath as-path multipath-relax command.
c. the paths were received from IBGP or EBGP neighbor respectively. 10. If the bgp bestpath router-id ignore command is enabled and: a. if the Router-ID is the same for multiple paths (because the routes were received from the same route) skip this step. b. if the Router-ID is NOT the same for multiple paths, prefer the path that was first received as the Best Path. The path selection algorithm returns without performing any of the checks detailed here. 11.
Figure 23. BGP Local Preference Multi-Exit Discriminators (MEDs) If two ASs connect in more than one place, a multi-exit discriminator (MED) can be used to assign a preference to a preferred path. MED is one of the criteria used to determine the best path, so keep in mind that other criteria may impact selection, as shown in the illustration in Best Path Selection Criteria. One AS assigns the MED a value and the other AS uses that value to decide the preferred path.
Figure 24. Multi-Exit Discriminators NOTE: Configuring the set metric-type internal command in a route-map advertises the IGP cost as MED to outbound EBGP peers when redistributing routes. The configured set metric value overwrites the default IGP cost. If the outbound route-map uses MED, it overwrites IGP MED. Origin The origin indicates the origin of the prefix, or how the prefix came into BGP. There are three origin codes: IGP, EGP, INCOMPLETE.
Example of Viewing AS Paths DellEMC#show ip bgp paths Total 30655 Paths Refcount Metric Path 3 18508 701 3549 19421 i 3 18508 701 7018 14990 i 3 18508 209 4637 1221 9249 9249 i 2 18508 701 17302 i 26 18508 209 22291 i 75 18508 209 3356 2529 i 2 18508 209 1239 19265 i 1 18508 701 2914 4713 17935 i 162 18508 209 i 2 18508 701 19878 ? 31 18508 209 18756 i 2 18508 209 7018 15227 i 10 18508 209 3356 13845 i 3 18508 209 701 6347 7781 i 1 18508 701 3561 9116 21350 i Next Hop The next hop is the IP address used to
IPv4 and IPv6 address family The IPv4 address family configuration in Dell EMC Networking OS is used for identifying routing sessions for protocols that use IPv4 address. You can specify multicast within the IPv4 address family. The default of address family configuration is IPv4 unicast. You can configure the VRF instances for IPv4 address family configuration. The IPv6 address family configuration is used for identifying routing sessions for protocols that use IPv6 address.
Item Default reuse = 750 suppress = 2000 max-suppress-time = 60 minutes Distance external distance = 20 internal distance = 200 local distance = 200 Timers keepalive = 60 seconds holdtime = 180 seconds Add-path Disabled Implement BGP with Dell EMC Networking OS The following sections describe how to implement BGP on Dell EMC Networking OS.
Ignore Router-ID in Best-Path Calculation You can avoid unnecessary BGP best-path transitions between external paths under certain conditions. The bgp bestpath routerid ignore command reduces network disruption caused by routing and forwarding plane changes and allows for faster convergence. AS Number Migration With this feature you can transparently change the AS number of an entire BGP network and ensure that the routes are propagated throughout the network while the migration is in progress.
BGP4 Management Information Base (MIB) The FORCE10-BGP4-V2-MIB enhances support for BGP management information base (MIB) with many new simple network management protocol (SNMP) objects and notifications (traps) defined in draft-ietf-idr-bgp4-mibv2-05. To see these enhancements, download the MIB from the Dell website. NOTE: For the Force10-BGP4-V2-MIB and other MIB documentation, refer to the Dell iSupport web page.
Configuration Information The software supports BGPv4 as well as the following: • • • • deterministic multi-exit discriminator (MED) (default) a path with a missing MED is treated as worst path and assigned an MED value of (0xffffffff) the community format follows RFC 1998 delayed configuration (the software at system boot reads the entire configuration file prior to sending messages to start BGP peer sessions) The following are not yet supported: • • auto-summarization (the default is no auto-summary) s
CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number • as-number: from 0 to 65535 (2 Byte) or from 1 to 4294967295 (4 Byte) or 0.1 to 65535.65535 (Dotted format). Only one AS is supported per system. NOTE: If you enter a 4-Byte AS number, 4-Byte AS support is enabled automatically. 2. Add a BGP neighbor or peer and AS number.
NOTE: The showconfig command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode gives the same information as the show running-config bgp command. The following example displays two neighbors: one is an external internal BGP neighbor and the second one is an internal BGP neighbor. The first line of the output for each neighbor displays the AS number and states whether the link is an external or internal (shown in bold). The third line of the show ip bgp neighbors output contains the BGP State.
The following example shows the show ip bgp summary command output (4–byte AS number displays). R2#show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 1.1.1.1, local 80000 BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 1 neighbor(s) using 40960 bytes of memory Neighbor 20.20.20.1 AS 200 MsgRcvd 0 MsgSent 0 TblVer 0 InQ 0 OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 0 00:00:00 0 Changing a BGP router ID BGP uses the configured router ID to identify the devices in the network.
• Enable ASPLAIN AS Number representation. • CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asplain NOTE: ASPLAIN is the default method Dell EMC Networking OS uses and does not appear in the configuration display. Enable ASDOT AS Number representation. • CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot Enable ASDOT+ AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot+ The following example shows the bgp asnotation asplain command output.
• Enter the router configuration mode and the AS number. • CONFIG mode router bgp as-number Add the IP address of the neighbor for the specified autonomous system. • CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | ipv6–address | peer-group-name} remote-as as-number Enable the neighbor. • CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor ip-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name no shutdown Specify the IPv4 address family configuration.
To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, you can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. Be sure that you make the necessary changes. Example-Configuring BGP routing between peers Example of enabling BGP in Router A Following is an example to enable BGP configuration in the router A. RouterA# configure terminal RouterA(conf)# router bgp 40000 RouterA(conf-router_bgp)# bgp router-id 10.1.1.99 RouterA(conf-router_bgp)# timers bgp 80 130 RouterA(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.
• • • • • • • You must create a peer group first before adding the neighbors in the peer group. If you remove any configuration parameters from a peer group, it will apply to all the neighbors configured under that peer group. If you have not configured a parameter for an individual neighbor in the peer group, the neighbor uses the value configured in the peer group. If you reset any parameter for an individual neighbor, it will override the value set in the peer group.
• • • • • • neighbor neighbor neighbor neighbor neighbor neighbor distribute-list out filter-list out next-hop-self route-map out route-reflector-client send-community A neighbor may keep its configuration after it was added to a peer group if the neighbor’s configuration is more specific than the peer group’s and if the neighbor’s configuration does not affect outgoing updates.
The following illustration shows the configurations described on the following examples. These configurations show how to create BGP areas using physical and virtual links. They include setting up the interfaces and peers groups with each other. Figure 27. BGP peer group example configurations Example of Enabling BGP (Router 1) R1# conf R1(conf)#int loop 0 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.1/32 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.
R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.2 no shut R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source loop 0 R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.33 remote 100 R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.33 no shut R1(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 99 network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor 192.168.128.2 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 10.0.3.33 no shutdown neighbor 10.0.3.
R3(conf-if-te-3/21/1)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 3/21/1 ip address 10.0.2.3/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/21/1)# R3(conf-if-te-3/21/1)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.31 remote 99 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.3.31 no shut R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.2.2 remote 99 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 10.0.2.2 no shut R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 100 neighbor 10.0.3.31 remote 99 neighbor 10.0.3.
R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.1 no shut R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.3 peer BBB R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.3 no shut R2(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 99 network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor BBB peer-group neighbor BBB no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.1 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.1 peer-group CCC neighbor 192.168.128.1 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.128.1 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.
Advanced BGP configuration tasks The following sections describe how to configure the advanced (optional) BGP configuration tasks. Route-refresh and Soft-reconfiguration BGP soft-reconfiguration allows for faster and easier route changing. Changing routing policies typically requires a reset of BGP sessions (the TCP connection) for the policies to take effect. Such resets cause undue interruption to traffic due to hard reset of the BGP cache and the time it takes to re-establish the session.
Route-refresh This section explains how the soft-reconfiguration and route-refresh works. Soft-reconfiguration has to be configured explicitly for a neighbor unlike route refresh, which is automatically negotiated between BGP peers when establishing a peer session. The route-refresh updates will be sent, only if the neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound command is not configured in a BGP neighbor and when you do a soft reset using clear ip bgp {neighbor-address | peer-group-name} soft in command.
neighbor 20.1.1.2 no shutdown neighbor 20::2 remote-as 200 neighbor 20::2 no shutdown ! address-family ipv6 unicast redistribute connected neighbor 20::2 activate exit-address-family ! DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#do clear ip bgp 20.1.1.2 soft in May 8 15:28:11 : BGP: 20.1.1.2 sending ROUTE_REFRESH AFI/SAFI (1/1) May 8 15:28:12 : BGP: 20.1.1.2 UPDATE rcvd packet len 56 May 8 15:28:12 : BGP: 20.1.1.2 rcvd UPDATE w/ attr: origin ?, path 200, nexthop 20.1.1.
Configuring BGP aggregate routes To create an aggregate route entry in the BGP routing table, use the following commands. The aggregate route is advertised from the autonomous system. • Enter the router configuration mode and the AS number for the specific BGP routing process. • CONFIG mode router bgp as-number Create an aggregate entry in the BGP routing table.
Following is the sample configuration to suppress the advertisement of specific aggregate routes to all neighbors. DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 100 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# aggregate-address 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 summary-only DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# exit DellEMC(conf)# Filtering BGP The following section describes the methods used to filter the updates received from BGP neighbors.
DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#neigh AAA no shut DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 99 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor 10.155.15.2 remote-as 32 neighbor 10.155.15.2 shutdown DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)#neigh 10.155.15.
1. Create a prefix list and assign it a name. CONFIGURATION mode ip prefix-list prefix-name 2. Create multiple prefix list filters with a deny or permit action. CONFIG-PREFIX LIST mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {any | ip-prefix [ge | le] } • • ge: minimum prefix length to be matched. le: maximum prefix length to me matched. For information about configuring prefix lists, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs). 3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIG-PREFIX LIST mode exit 4. Enter ROUTER BGP mode.
For information about configuring route maps, see Access Control Lists (ACLs). 3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode exit 4. Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5. Filter routes based on the criteria in the configured route map.
CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name} filter-list as-path-name {in | out} If you assign an non-existent or empty AS-PATH ACL, the software allows all routes. To view all BGP path attributes in the BGP database, use the show ip bgp paths command in EXEC Privilege mode.
DellEMC(conf)# exit DellEMC# In the above example, add a BGP neighbor to the AS 400 and the route-map called route2 applied to inbound routes from the BGP neighbor at 10.10.10.1. A route map route2 is created with a permit clause and the route’s community attribute is matched to communities in community list 1. A community list 1 that permits routes with a communities attribute of 100. To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode.
fall-over enabled Update source set to Loopback 0 Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 52, neighbor version 52 4 accepted prefixes consume 16 bytes Prefix advertised 0, denied 0, withdrawn 0 Connections established 6; dropped 5 Last reset 00:19:37, due to Reset by peer Notification History 'Connection Reset' Sent : 5 Recv: 0 Local host: 20.20.20.2, Local port: 65519 Foreign host: 10.10.10.
neighbor peer-group-name subnet subnet-number mask The peer group responds to OPEN messages sent on this subnet. 3. Enable the peer group. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor peer-group-name no shutdown 4. Create and specify a remote peer for BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor peer-group-name remote-as as-number Only after the peer group responds to an OPEN message sent on the subnet does its BGP state change to ESTABLISHED.
The below example configuration shows how to enable the BGP graceful restart. DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 400 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# bgp graceful-restart DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# exit Redistributing Routes In addition to filtering routes, you can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the BGP process. You can configure the device to redistribute ISIS, OSPF, static, or directly connected routes into BGP process using the redistribute command.
1. Allow the advertisement of multiple paths (send, receive or both). CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP or CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP-AF mode bgp add-path [both | enable | receive | send] path-count Configure the following parameters: • • • • • both: Indicate that the system sends and accepts multiple paths from peers. enable: Indicate that the system enables add-path support for the node. send: Indicate that the system sends multiple paths to peers. receive: Indicate that the system accepts multiple paths from peers.
• • • • no-advertise: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_ADVERTISE. no-export: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT. quote-regexp: then any number of regular expressions. The software applies all regular expressions in the list. regexp: then a regular expression. To view the configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION COMMUNITY-LIST or CONFIGURATION EXTCOMMUNITY LIST mode or the show ip {community-lists | extcommunity-list} command in EXEC Privilege mode.
deny 14551:112 deny 701:667 deny 702:667 deny 703:667 deny 704:666 deny 705:666 deny 14551:666 DellEMC# Configure BGP attributes Following sections explain how to configure the BGP attributes such as MED, COMMUNITY, WEIGHT, and LOCAL_PREFERENCE. Changing MED Attributes By default, Dell EMC Networking OS uses the MULTI_EXIT_DISC or MED attribute when comparing EBGP paths received from different BGP neighbors or peers from the same AS for the same route.
Configure a community list by denying or permitting specific community numbers or types of community. • • • • • • community-number: use AA:NN format where AA is the AS number (2 or 4 Bytes) and NN is a value specific to that autonomous system. local-AS: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED and are not sent to EBGP peers. no-advertise: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_ADVERTISE and are not advertised. no-export: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT.
value: the range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 100. DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 400 DellEMC(conf_router_bgp)# neighbor 10.10.10.1 remote-as 500 DellEMC(conf_router_bgp)# bgp default local-preference 150 DellEMC(conf_router_bgp)# exit In the above example configuration, the default LOCAL_PREFERENCE value is changed to 150 for all the updates from AS 500 to AS 400. The default value is 100.
• If you do not use the all keyword, the next hop of only eBGP-learned routes is updated by the route reflector. If you use the all keyword, the next hop of both eBGP- and iBGP-learned routes are updated by the route reflector. Sets the next hop address. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set next-hop ip-address If the set next-hop command is applied on the out-bound interface using a route map, it takes precedence over the neighbor next-hop-self command.
Route Reflectors Route reflectors reorganize the iBGP core into a hierarchy and allow some route advertisement rules. NOTE: Do not use route reflectors (RRs) in the forwarding path. In iBGP, hierarchal RRs maintaining forwarding plane RRs could create routing loops. Route reflection divides iBGP peers into two groups: client peers and nonclient peers. A route reflector and its client peers form a route reflection cluster.
When you enter this command for the first time, the router configures as a route reflector and the specified BGP neighbors configure as clients in the route reflector cluster. When you remove all clients of a route reflector using the no neighbor route-reflectorclient command, the router no longer functions as a route reflector. When you enable a route reflector, Dell EMC Networking OS automatically enables route reflection to all clients.
• • suppress: the range is from 1 to 20000. This number is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is greater than the suppress value, the flapping route is no longer advertised (that is, it is suppressed). The default is 2000. • max-suppress-time: the range is from 1 to 255. The maximum number of minutes a route can be suppressed. The default is four times the half-life value. The default is 60 minutes. Clear all information or only information on a specific route.
To view which routes are dampened (non-active), use the show ip bgp dampened-routes command in EXEC Privilege mode. Changing BGP keepalive and hold timers BGP uses timers to control the activity of sending the keepalive messages to its neighbors or peers. Also, you can adjust the interval of how long the device has to wait for a keepalive messge from a neighbor before declaring the peer dead. To configure BGP timers, use either or both of the following commands.
CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbors {ip-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name} timers extended idle-holdtime • idle-holdtime: the range is from 1 to 32767. Time interval, in seconds, during which the peer remains in idle state. The default is 15 seconds. Configure idle-holdtime values for all BGP neighbors. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode timers bgp extended idle holdtime idle-holdtime: the range is from 1 to 32767. Time interval, in seconds, during which the peer remains in idle state. The default is 15 seconds.
ROUTER-BGP Mode shutdown address-family-ipv6-unicast When you configure BGP, you must explicitly enable the BGP neighbors using the following commands: neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown For more information on enabling BGP, see Enabling BGP.
confederations appear as one AS. Within the confederation sub-AS, the IBGP neighbors are fully meshed and the MED, NEXT_HOP, and LOCAL_PREF attributes are maintained between confederations. To configure BGP confederations, use the following commands. • Specifies the confederation ID. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp confederation identifier as-number • • as-number: from 0 to 65535 (2 Byte) or from 1 to 4294967295 (4 Byte). Specifies which confederation sub-AS are peers.
DellEMC(conf-router_bgpv6_af)# neighbor 50.0.0.2 activate DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# exit Following is the output of show ip bgp vrf vrf1 summary command for the above configuration. DellEMC#show ip bgp vrf vrf1 summary BGP router identifier 1.1.1.1, local AS number 100 BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 1 neighbor(s) using 16384 bytes of memory Neighbor 50.0.0.
network 192.168.10.0/24 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 10.10.21.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.21.1 filter-list Laura in neighbor 10.10.21.1 no shutdown neighbor 10.10.32.3 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.32.3 no shutdown neighbor 100.10.92.9 remote-as 65192 neighbor 100.10.92.9 local-as 6500 neighbor 100.10.92.9 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.10.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 192.168.10.1 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.10.1 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.12.2 remote-as 65123 neighbor 192.168.12.
Enabling MBGP Configurations Multiprotocol BGP (MBGP) is an enhanced BGP that carries IP multicast routes. BGP carries two sets of routes: one set for unicast routing and one set for multicast routing. The routes associated with multicast routing are used by the protocol independent multicast (PIM) to build data distribution trees. Dell EMC Networking OS MBGP is implemented per RFC 1858. You can enable the MBGP feature per router and/or per peer/peer-group. The default is IPv4 Unicast routes.
DellEMC(conf-router_bgpv6_af)#neighbor 2001::1 activate DellEMC(conf-router_bgpv6_af)#exit Following is the output of show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary command for the above configuration example. DellEMC#show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary BGP router identifier 1.1.1.
BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 3 neighbor(s) using 40960 bytes of memory Neighbor 20.20.20.2 30.30.30.1 2001::2 AS 200 20 200 MsgRcvd 10 0 40 MsgSent 20 0 45 TblVer 0 0 0 InQ 0 0 0 OutQ 0 0 0 Up/Down 00:06:11 00:00:00 00:03:14 State/Pfx 0 0 0 The same output will be displayed when using show ip bgp ipv4 unicast summary command. Following is the sample output of show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary command. R1# show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary BGP router identifier 1.
20.20.20.1 R2# 10 10 20 0 0 0 00:06:11 0 Following is the output of show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary command for the above configuration example. R2#show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary BGP router identifier 2.2.2.2, local AS number 200 BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 2 neighbor(s) using 24576 bytes of memory Neighbor 20.20.20.
Following is the show running-config command output for the above configuration. DellEMC# show running-config bgp ! router bgp 655 bgp router-id 1.1.1.1 neighbor 10.1.1.2 remote-as 20 neighbor 10.1.1.2 auto-local-address neighbor 10.1.1.2 no shutdown ! address-family ipv6 unicast neighbor 10.1.1.2 activate exit-address-family ! Example configuration performed in R2 DellEMC# configure terminal DellEMC(conf)# router bgp 20 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 10.1.1.
Debugging BGP To enable BGP debugging, use any of the following commands. • View all information about BGP, including BGP events, keepalives, notifications, and updates. • EXEC Privilege mode debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] [in | out] View information about BGP route being dampened. • EXEC Privilege mode debug ip bgp dampening [in | out] View information about local BGP state changes and other BGP events.
Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 1395, neighbor version 1394 Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), 0 withdrawn by peer Prefixes advertised 0, rejected 0, 0 withdrawn from peer Connections established 3; dropped 2 Last reset 00:00:12, due to Missing well known att
10 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) CAM Allocation CAM Allocation for Ingress To allocate the space for regions such has L2 ingress ACL, IPV4 ingress ACL, IPV6 ingress ACL, IPV4 QoS, L2 QoS, PBR, VRF ACL, and so forth, use the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode. The CAM space is allotted in field processor (FP) blocks. The total space allocated must equal 9 FP blocks. The following table lists the default CAM allocation settings.
Additional CAM Allocation Setting ISCSI Opt ACL (iscsioptacl) 0 You must enter l2acl, ipv4acl, l2qos, l2pt, ipv4qos, ipv4pbr, vrfv4acl, and fcoe allocations as a factor of 2, ipv6acl, openflow, and vman_qos allocations as a factor of 3. Ipv4 acl region should also be in multiples of 3 when ipv4udf option is enabled. All other profile allocations can use either even or odd numbered ranges. NOTE: You can only have one odd number of blocks in the CLI configuration; the other blocks must be in factors of 2.
Example of the test cam-usage Command DellEMC#test cam-usage service-policy input test-cam-usage stack-unit 1 po 0 Stack-Unit| Portpipe|CAM Partition|Available CAM|Estimated CAM per Port|Status -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2 | 0 |IPv4Flow |192 |3 |Allowed (64) DellEMC# View CAM-ACL Settings The show cam-acl command shows the cam-acl setting that will be loaded after the next reload.
Ipv4Qos : L2Qos : L2PT : IpMacAcl : VmanQos : EtsAcl : FcoeAcl : ipv4pbr : vrfv4Acl : Openflow : fedgovacl : nlbclusteracl: 2 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- stack-unit 1 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 2 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 2 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 1 VmanQos : 0 EtsAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 View CAM Usage View the amount of CAM space available, used, and remaining in each partition (including IPv
IPV4, IPV6. The system checks the CAM usage of the features with the set threshold to display a syslog message, which contains the CAM region, slot/port-pipe and pipeline information. By default, syslog warning appears when the CAM usage is 90 percent. You can also configure the silence period for the syslog message on the CAM usage. A syslog warning appears when the CAM usage exceeds the configured CAM threshold. The silence period starts after the initial syslog warning.
CAM Optimization When you enable the CAM optimization, if a Policy Map containing classification rules (ACL and/or DSCP/ ip-precedence rules) is applied to more than one physical interface on the same port-pipe, only a single copy of the policy is written (only one FP entry is used). When you disable this command, the system behaves as described in this chapter. Troubleshoot CAM Profiling The following section describes CAM profiling troubleshooting.
UFT Mode L2 MAC Table Size L3 Host Table Size L3 LPM Table Size Scaled-l3-routes 8K 8K 128K Scaled-l2–switch 136K 8K 16K Configuring UFT Modes To configure the Unified Forwarding Table (UFT) modes, follow these steps. 1. Select a mode to initialize the maximum scalability size for L2 MAC table or L3 Host table or L3 Route table.
• • • When CAM sharing is enabled, 32 FP entries are allocated to IPv4 QoS region by default and the remaining entries are shared according to the configured percentage values. When CAM sharing is enabled, a policy map with a single rule match ip dscp is installed in the DSCP table and no FP entries are used. A combination of multiple rules including match ip dscp in a policy map or a single rule other than match ip dscp are installed in CAM similar to the existing behavior.
11 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. That filter prevents traffic not specifically identified as legitimate from reaching the system control plane, rate-limits, traffic to an acceptable level.
Figure 31. CoPP Implemented Versus CoPP Not Implemented Topics: • Configure Control Plane Policing Configure Control Plane Policing The system can process a maximum of 8500 packets per second (PPS). Protocols that share a single queue may experience flaps if one of the protocols receives a high rate of control traffic even though per protocol CoPP is applied. This happens because queue-based rate limiting is applied first.
Configuring CoPP for Protocols This section lists the commands necessary to create and enable the service-policies for CoPP. For complete information about creating ACLs and QoS rules, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs) and Quality of Service (QoS). The basics for creating a CoPP service policy are to create a Layer 2, Layer 3, and/or an IPv6 ACL rule for the desired protocol type. Then, create a QoS input policy to rate-limit the protocol traffics according to the ACL.
DellEMC(conf)#ipv6 access-list ipv6-icmp cpu-qos DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#permit icmp DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#exit DellEMC(conf)#ipv6 access-list ipv6-vrrp cpu-qos DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#permit vrrp DellEMC(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#exit The following example shows creating the QoS input policy.
2. Create an input policy-map to assign the QoS policy to the desired service queues.l. CONFIGURATION mode policy-map--input name cpu-qos service-queue queue-number qos-policy name 3. Enter Control Plane mode. CONFIGURATION mode control-plane-cpuqos 4. Assign a CPU queue-based service policy on the control plane in cpu-qos mode. Enabling this command sets the queue rates according to those configured.
CPU Weig CPU Queue Queu ht Rate Shape e (PPS Rate) Protocol 7 64 400 xSTP, LACP, 802DOT1X, TRILL, L2PT, ECFM 8 64 600 LLDP, PVST, GVRP, FEFD, TRACEFLOW, FCoE 9 64 600 BGP, OSPF, IPV6-TUNNEL, IPV6-VRRP, RIP, ISIS 10 64 600 IPV4-VRRP, DHCP 11 64 300 MLD, PIM, MSDP Configuring Protocol to CPU Queue Mapping You can configure the mapping between CPU queues and the protocols that can be assigned to each CPU queue.
Viewing Queue Rates Example of Viewing Queue Rates DellEMC#show cpu-queue rate cp Service-Queue Rate (PPS) -----------------------Q0 600 Q1 1000 Q2 300 Q3 1300 Q4 2000 Q5 400 Q6 400 Q7 400 Q8 600 Q9 600 Q10 600 Q11 300 Burst (Packets) ---------512 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 To view the queue mapping for each configured protocol, use the show ip protocol-queue-mapping command.
ICMPV6 RS ICMPV6 VRRPV6 OSPFV3 DellEMC# 242 any any any any any any any any Control Plane Policing (CoPP) _ _ _ _ Q5 Q6 Q10 Q9 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
12 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of enhancements to Ethernet local area networks used in data center environments, particularly with clustering and storage area networks.
Traffic Description LAN traffic LAN traffic consists of many flows that are insensitive to latency requirements, while certain applications, such as streaming video, are more sensitive to latency. Ethernet functions as a best-effort network that may drop packets in the case of network congestion.
• iSCSI storage traffic with priority 4. In the Dell EMC Networking OS, PFC is implemented as follows: • • • • • • PFC is supported on specified 802.1p priority traffic (dot1p 0 to 7) and is configured per interface. However, only lossless queues are supported on an interface: one for Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) converged traffic and one for Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) storage traffic. Configure the same lossless queues on all ports.
In Dell EMC Networking OS, ETS is implemented as follows: • ETS supports groups of 802.1p priorities that have: • • PFC enabled or disabled • No bandwidth limit or no ETS processing ETS uses the DCB MIB IEEE 802.1azd2.5. Data Center Bridging Exchange Protocol (DCBx) DCBx allows a switch to automatically discover DCB-enabled peers and exchange configuration information. PFC and ETS use DCBx to exchange and negotiate parameters with peer devices.
• FCoE initialization protocol (FIP) snooping DCB processes virtual local area network (VLAN)-tagged packets and dot1p priority values. Untagged packets are treated with a dot1p priority of 0. For DCB to operate effectively, you can classify ingress traffic according to its dot1p priority so that it maps to different data queues. The dot1p-queue assignments used are shown in the following table. To enable DCB, enable either the iSCSI optimization configuration or the FCoE configuration.
The default dot1p priority-queue assignments are applied as follows: DellEMC(conf)#do show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Dot1p Priority : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue : 1 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 PFC is not applied on specific dot1p priorities. ETS: Equal bandwidth is assigned to each port queue and each dot1p priority in a priority group. To configure PFC and ETS parameters on an interface, you must specify the PFC mode, the ETS bandwidth allocation for a priority group, and the 802.
Port A —> Port B Port C —> Port B PFC no-drop queues are configured for queues 3, 4 on Port B. PFC capability is enabled on priorities 3, 4 on PORT A and C. Port B acting as Egress During the congestion, [traffic pump on priorities 3 and 4 from PORT A and PORT C is at full line rate], PORT A and C send out the PFCs to rate the traffic limit. Egress drops are not observed on Port B since traffic flow on priorities is mapped to loss less queues.
It is the user responsibility to have symmetric PFC configurations on the interfaces involved in a particular PFC-enabled traffic-flow to obtain lossless behavior. Configuring PFC in a DCB Map A switch supports the use of a DCB map in which you configure priority-based flow control (PFC) setting. To configure PFC parameters, you must apply a DCB map on an interface. PFC Configuration Notes PFC provides flow control based on the 802.
The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure PFC in a DCB map: • • You can enable PFC on a maximum of four priority queues on an interface. The default is two. Enabling PFC for dot1p priorities configures the corresponding port queue as lossless. You cannot enable PFC and link-level flow control at the same time on an interface.
Table 19. Configuring PFC Assymetric Step Task Command Command Mode 1 Enter interface configuration mode on an Ethernet port. DellEMC#interface interface-type CONFIGURATION 2 Enable pfc asymmetric on interface.
The default pause threshold size is 9 KB for all interfaces. This default behavior is impacted if you modify the total buffer available for PFC or assign static buffer configurations to the individual PFC queues. Shared headroom for lossless or PFC packets In switches that require lossless frame delivery, some fixed buffer is set aside to absorb any bursty traffic that arrives after flow control is configured (PFC in this case). This extra buffer space is called the PG headroom.
In the shared headroom feature, the main assumption is that not every PG uses the headroom buffer at the same time. This approach enables the system to save the headroom buffer space that is reserved for every PG to guarantee lossless delivery during traffic bursts. For each PG, you can assign a lower value for headroom buffer. This headroom buffer is sufficient enough to guarantee lossless behavior as this buffer is global and is shared among all the lossless queues.
Headroom-Pool Configured Buffer(KB) Used Buffer(KB) ----------------------------------------------------------------HP1 0 0 DellEMC# Monitoring Buffer Statistics for Tracking Purposes Using the buffer statistics tracking feature, you can monitor the peak buffer usage of the head room pool over a specific period of time. This monitoring enables you to optimize the head room pool size based on real-time network traffic data.
• • dellNetFpStatsPerPgTable dellNetPfcPerPrioTable dellNetFpEgrQBuf This table fetches the BST statistics at Egress Port for the buffer used. This table displays the Snapshot of the fSnapshotTable Buffer cells used by Unicast and Multicast Data and Control Queues. dellNetFpIngPgBu This table fetches the BST statistics at the Ingress Port for the Shared Cells, and the Headroom cells used per ffSnapshotTable Priority Group.
Dot1p Priority Queue 7 7 Default dot1p to queue configuration is as follows: Configuration Example for DSCP and PFC Priorities Consider a scenario in which the following DSCP and PFC priorities are necessary: DSCP 0 – 5, 10 - 15 Expected PFC Priority 1 20 – 25, 30 – 35 2 To configure the aforementioned DSCP and PFC priority values, perform the following tasks: 1.
For example, storage traffic is sensitive to frame loss; interprocess communication (IPC) traffic is latency-sensitive. ETS allows different traffic types to coexist without interruption in the same converged link by: • • Allocating a guaranteed share of bandwidth to each priority group. Allowing each group to exceed its minimum guaranteed bandwidth if another group is not fully using its allotted bandwidth. Creating an ETS Priority Group An ETS priority group specifies the range of 802.
ETS Operation with DCBx The following section describes DCBx negotiation with peer ETS devices. In DCBx negotiation with peer ETS devices, ETS configuration is handled as follows: • • • • ETS TLVs are supported in DCBx versions CIN, CEE, and IEEE2.5. The DCBx port-role configurations determine the ETS operational parameters (refer to Configure a DCBx Operation). ETS configurations received from TLVs from a peer are validated.
• Although ETS bandwidth allocation or strict-priority queuing does not support weighted random early detection (WRED), explicit congestion notification (ECN), rate shaping, and rate limiting because these parameters are not negotiated by DCBx with peer devices, you can apply a QoS output policy with WRED and/or rate shaping on a DCBx CIN-enabled interface.
Configure a DCBx Operation DCB devices use data center bridging exchange protocol (DCBx) to exchange configuration information with directly connected peers using the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) protocol. DCBx can detect the misconfiguration of a peer DCB device, and optionally, configure peer DCB devices with DCB feature settings to ensure consistent operation in a data center network.
• • If the peer configuration received is compatible with the internally propagated port configuration, the link with the DCBx peer is enabled. If the received peer configuration is not compatible with the currently configured port configuration, the link with the DCBx peer port is disabled and a syslog message for an incompatible configuration is generated. The network administrator must then reconfigure the peer device so that it advertises a compatible DCB configuration.
Configuration Source Election When an auto-upstream or auto-downstream port receives a DCB configuration from a peer, the port first checks to see if there is an active configuration source on the switch. • • If a configuration source already exists, the received peer configuration is checked against the local port configuration. If the received configuration is compatible, the DCBx marks the port as DCBx-enabled.
NOTE: Because DCBx TLV processing is best effort, it is possible that CIN frames may be processed when DCBx is configured to operate in CEE mode and vice versa. In this case, the unrecognized TLVs cause the unrecognized TLV counter to increment, but the frame is processed and is not discarded. Legacy DCBx (CIN and CEE) supports the DCBx control state machine that is defined to maintain the sequence number and acknowledge the number sent in the DCBx control TLVs.
interface type slot/port 2. Enter LLDP Configuration mode to enable DCBx operation. INTERFACE mode [no] protocol lldp 3. Configure the DCBx version used on the interface, where: auto configures the port to operate using the DCBx version received from a peer. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] DCBx version {auto | cee | cin | ieee-v2.5} • • • cee: configures the port to use CEE (Intel 1.01). cin: configures the port to use Cisco-Intel-Nuova (DCBx 1.0). ieee-v2.5: configures the port to use IEEE 802.1Qaz (Draft 2.5).
configure 2. Enter LLDP Configuration mode to enable DCBx operation. CONFIGURATION mode [no] protocol lldp 3. Configure the DCBx version used on all interfaces not already configured to exchange DCB information. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] DCBx version {auto | cee | cin | ieee-v2.5} • • • auto: configures all ports to operate using the DCBx version received from a peer. cee: configures a port to use CEE (Intel 1.01). cin configures a port to use Cisco-Intel-Nuova (DCBx 1.0). ieee-v2.
DCBx Error Messages The following syslog messages appear when an error in DCBx operation occurs. LLDP_MULTIPLE_PEER_DETECTED: DCBx is operationally disabled after detecting more than one DCBx peer on the port interface. LLDP_PEER_AGE_OUT: DCBx is disabled as a result of LLDP timing out on a DCBx peer interface. DSM_DCBx_PEER_VERSION_CONFLICT: A local port expected to receive the IEEE, CIN, or CEE version in a DCBx TLV from a remote peer but received a different, conflicting DCBx version.
Command Output show interface port-type ets {summary | detail} Displays the ETS configuration applied to egress traffic on an interface, including priority groups with priorities and bandwidth allocation. To clear ETS TLV counters, enter the clear ets counters interface port-type slot/port command. show interface port-type DCBx detail Plays the DCBx configuration on an interface. show Displays the PFC configuration applied to ingress traffic, including priorities and link delay.
-------------------------------------FCOE TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 0 Input TLV pkts, 1 Output TLV pkts, 0 Error pkts, 0 Pause Tx pkts, 0 Pause Rx pkts The following table describes the show interface pfc summary command fields. Table 24. show interface pfc summary Command Description Fields Description Interface Interface type with and port number.
Fields Description PFC TLV Statistics: Output TLV pkts Number of PFC TLVs transmitted. PFC TLV Statistics: Error pkts Number of PFC error packets received. PFC TLV Statistics: Pause Tx pkts Number of PFC pause frames transmitted. PFC TLV Statistics: Pause Rx pkts Number of PFC pause frames received The following example shows the show interface pfc statistics command.
Oper status is init ETS DCBX Oper status is Down Reason: Port Shutdown State Machine Type is Asymmetric Conf TLV Tx Status is enabled Reco TLV Tx Status is enabled The following example shows the show interface ets detail command.
Table 25. show interface ets detail Command Description Field Description Interface Interface type with and port number. Maximum Supported Maximum number of priority groups supported. Number of Traffic Classes Number of 802.1p priorities currently configured. Admin mode ETS mode: on or off. Admin Parameters ETS configuration on local port, including priority groups, assigned dot1p priorities, and bandwidth allocation.
0 PFC Pause Tx pkts, 0 Pause Rx pkts 1 Input ETS Conf TLV Pkts, 1 Output ETS Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Error ETS Conf TLV Pkts 1 Input ETS Reco TLV pkts, 1 Output ETS Reco TLV pkts, 0 Error ETS Reco TLV Pkts The following example shows the show interface DCBx detail command (legacy CEE).
Field Description Local DCBx TLVs Transmitted Transmission status (enabled or disabled) of advertised DCB TLVs (see TLV code at the top of the show command output). Local DCBx Status: DCBx Operational Version DCBx version advertised in Control TLVs. Local DCBx Status: DCBx Max Version Supported Highest DCBx version supported in Control TLVs. Local DCBx Status: Sequence Number Sequence number transmitted in Control TLVs.
dcb enable 2. Configure the shared PFC buffer size and the total buffer size. A maximum of 4 lossless queues are supported. CONFIGURATION mode dcb pfc-shared-buffer-size value dcb pfc-total-buffer-size value The buffer size range is from 0 to 3399. Default is 3088. 3. Configure the number of PFC queues. CONFIGURATION mode dcb enable pfc-queues pfc-queues The number of ports supported based on lossless queues configured depends on the buffer. The default number of PFC queues in the system is two.
Figure 36. PFC and ETS Applied to LAN, IPC, and SAN Priority Traffic QoS Traffic Classification: The service-class dynamic dot1p command has been used in Global Configuration mode to map ingress dot1p frames to the queues shown in the following table. For more information, refer to QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment.
The following describes the priority group-bandwidth assignment. Priority Group Bandwidth Assignment IPC 5% SAN 50% LAN 45% PFC and ETS Configuration Command Examples The following examples show PFC and ETS configuration commands to manage your data center traffic. 1. Enabling DCB DellEMC(conf)#dcb enable 2. Configure DCB map and enable PFC, and ETS 3.
13 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) DHCP is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators.
Option Number and Description Specifies the client’s subnet mask. Router Option 3 Specifies the router IP addresses that may serve as the client’s default gateway. Domain Name Server Option 6 Domain Name Option 15 Specifies the domain name servers (DNSs) that are available to the client. Specifies the domain name that clients should use when resolving hostnames via DNS.
2. Servers unicast or broadcast a DHCPOFFER message in response to the DHCPDISCOVER that offers to the client values for the requested parameters. Multiple servers might respond to a single DHCPDISCOVER; the client might wait a period of time and then act on the most preferred offer. 3. The client broadcasts a DHCPREQUEST message in response to the offer, requesting the offered values. 4.
Configure the System to be a DHCP Server A DHCP server is a network device that has been programmed to provide network configuration parameters to clients upon request. Servers typically serve many clients, making host management much more organized and efficient. NOTE: If the management port is associated with any non-default VRF, then the ip address dhcp command does not work. The following table lists the key responsibilities of DHCP servers. Table 27.
Configuration Tasks To configure DHCP, an administrator must first set up a DHCP server and provide it with configuration parameters and policy information including IP address ranges, lease length specifications, and configuration data that DHCP hosts need. Configuring the Dell system to be a DHCP server is a three-step process: 1. Configuring the Server for Automatic Address Allocation 2.
dns-server address Using NetBIOS WINS for Address Resolution Windows internet naming service (WINS) is a name resolution service that Microsoft DHCP clients use to correlate host names to IP addresses within a group of networks. Microsoft DHCP clients can be one of four types of NetBIOS nodes: broadcast, peer-to-peer, mixed, or hybrid. 1. Specify the NetBIOS WINS name servers, in order of preference, that are available to Microsoft Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) clients.
EXEC Privilege mode. clear ip dhcp binding ip address Configure the System to be a DHCP Client A DHCP client is a network device that requests an IP address and configuration parameters from a DHCP server. Implement the DHCP client functionality as follows: • The switch can obtain a dynamically assigned IP address from a DHCP server. A start-up configuration is not received. Use bare metal provisioning (BMP) to receive configuration parameters (Dell EMC Networking OS version and a configuration file).
To renew the lease time of the dynamically acquired IP, use the renew dhcp command on an interface already configured with a dynamic IP address. NOTE: To verify the currently configured dynamic IP address on an interface, use the show ip dhcp lease command. The show running-configuration command output only displays ip address dhcp. The currently assigned dynamic IP address does not display. To configure and view an interface as a DHCP client to receive an IP address, use the following commands. 1.
NOTE: Management routes added by the DHCP client include the specific routes to reach a DHCP server in a different subnet and the management route. DHCP Client Operation with Other Features The DHCP client operates with other Dell EMC Networking OS features, as the following describes. Stacking The DHCP client daemon runs only on the master unit and handles all DHCP packet transactions. It periodically synchronizes the lease file with the standby unit.
The following illustration depicts the topology in which routes are leaked between VRFs in the relay agent. VRF_1 VRF_2 DHCP Server --------------------- DHCP relay agent --------------------------- Client (10.0.0.1) (10.0.0.2) (20.0.0.2) (20.0.0.4) Configuring Route Leaking between VRFs on DHCP Relay Agent To configure route leaking between VRFs on DHCP relay agent, include the configuration similar to the following along with your DHCP relay configuration on your system.
ip prefix-list ip2 seq 5 permit 10.0.0.0/24 Non-default VRF configuration for DHCPv6 helper address The ipv6 helper-address command is enhanced to provide support for configuring VRF for DHCPv6 relay helper address. To forward DHCP packets between DHCP client and server if they are from different VRFs, you should configure route leak using route map between the VRFs. For more information on configuring route leak across VRF, see DHCP Relay when DHCP Server and Client are in Different VRFs.
Interface level DHCP relay source IPv4 or IPv6 configuration You can configure interface specific DHCP relay source IPv4 or IPv6 configuration. If the DHCP relay source interface is configured on the interface level, the DHCP relay forwards the packets from these interfaces to the DHCP server using the interface.
Dell(conf-if-vl-4)# tagged TenGigE 1/4 Dell(conf-if-vl-4)# ip helper-address vrf vrf1 100.0.0.1 Dell(conf-if-vl-4)# ipv6 helper-address vrf vrf1 100::1 Configure the System for User Port Stacking (Option 230) Set the stacking-option variable to provide stack-port detail on the DHCP server when you set the DHCP offer. A stack can be formed when the units are connected. Option 230 is the option for user port stacking. Use it to create up to eight stack groups.
• Assign IP addresses according to the relay agent. This prevents generating DHCP offers in response to requests from an unauthorized relay agent. The server echoes the option back to the relay agent in its response, and the relay agent uses the information in the option to forward a reply out the interface on which the request was received, rather than flooding it on the entire VLAN. The relay agent strips Option 82 from DHCP responses before forwarding them to the client.
and DHCPDECLINE packets are allowed so that the DHCP snooping table can decrease in size. After the table usage falls below the maximum limit of 4000 entries, new IP address assignments are allowed. NOTE: DHCP server packets are dropped on all non-trusted interfaces of a system configured for DHCP snooping. To prevent these packets from being dropped, configure ip dhcp snooping trust on the server-connected port.
ip dhcp snooping binding mac mac-address vlan-id vlan-id ip ip-address interface interfacetype interface-number lease lease-value If multiple IP addresses are expected for the same MAC address, repeat this step for all IP addresses. Adding a Static IPV6 DHCP Snooping Binding Table To add a static entry in the snooping database, use the following command. • Add a static entry in the snooping binding table.
Invalid Binding List of List of List of Binding Entry Entry lease expired Trust Ports DHCP Snooping Enabled Vlans DAI Trust ports : 0 : 0 :Te 1/4/1 :Vl 10 :Te 1/4/1 DellEMC#show ip dhcp snooping IP IP IP IP DHCP DHCP DHCP DHCP Snooping Snooping Mac Verification Relay Information-option Relay Trust Downstream : : : : Enabled. Disabled. Disabled. Disabled.
10.1.1.101 10.1.1.254 00:00:a0:00:00:00 00:00:a0:00:00:00 39736 162 S D Vl 200 Vl 200 Hu 1/4 Hu 1/4 The following example shows a sample output of the show ip dhcp snooping binding command for a device connected to the peer VLT node, but not to itself. The Po 10 interface is the VLTi link between the VLT peers.
10.1.1.251 10.1.1.252 10.1.1.253 10.1.1.254 00:00:4d:57:f2:50 00:00:4d:57:e6:f6 00:00:4d:57:f8:e8 00:00:4d:69:e8:f2 172800 172800 172740 172740 D D D D Vl Vl Vl Vl 10 10 10 10 Te Te Te Te 1/2/1 1/1/1 1/3/1 1/5/1 Total number of Entries in the table : 4 Dynamic ARP Inspection Dynamic address resolution protocol (ARP) inspection prevents ARP spoofing by forwarding only ARP frames that have been validated against the DHCP binding table.
--------------------------------------Valid ARP Requests : 0 Valid ARP Replies : 1000 Invalid ARP Requests : 1000 Invalid ARP Replies : 0 DellEMC# Configuring dynamic ARP inspection-limit To configure dynamic ARP inspection rate limit on a port, perform the following task. 1. Enter into global configuration mode. EXEC Privilege mode configure terminal 2. Select the interface to be configured. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface-name 3. Configure ARP packet inspection rate limiting.
Enabling IP Source Address Validation IP source address validation (SAV) prevents IP spoofing by forwarding only IP packets that have been validated against the DHCP binding table. A spoofed IP packet is one in which the IP source address is strategically chosen to disguise the attacker. For example, using ARP spoofing, an attacker can assume a legitimate client’s identity and receive traffic addressed to it. Then the attacker can spoof the client’s IP address to interact with other clients.
• Enable IP+MAC SAV. INTERFACE mode • ip dhcp source-address-validation ipmac Enable IP+MAC SAV with VLAN option. INTERFACE mode ip dhcp source-address-validation ipmac vlan vlan-id Dell EMC Networking OS creates an ACL entry for each IP+MAC address pair and optionally with its VLAN ID in the binding table and applies it to the interface. To display the IP+MAC ACL for an interface for the entire system, use the show ip dhcp snooping source-addressvalidation [interface] command in EXEC Privilege mode.
14 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity ECMP for flow-based affinity includes link bundle monitoring. Configuring the Hash Algorithm Seed Deterministic ECMP sorts ECMPs in order even though RTM provides them in a random order. However, the hash algorithm uses as a seed the lower 12 bits of the chassis MAC, which yields a different hash result for every chassis.
These two ecmp-groups are not related in any way. Example of Viewing Link Bundle Monitoring DellEMC# show link-bundle-distribution ecmp-group 1 Link-bundle trigger threshold - 60 ECMP bundle - 1 Utilization[In Percent] - 44 Alarm State - Active Interface Line Protocol Utilization[In Percent] Te 1/1/1 Up 36 Te 1/1/1 Up 52 Managing ECMP Group Paths To avoid path degeneration, configure the maximum number of paths for an ECMP route that the L3 CAM can hold.
• The default is 60%. Display details for an ECMP group bundle. EXEC mode show link-bundle-distribution ecmp-group ecmp-group-id The range is from 1 to 64. NOTE: An ecmp-group index is generated automatically for each unique ecmp-group when you configure multipath routes to the same network. The system can generate a maximum of 512 unique ecmp-groups. The ecmp-group indices are generated in even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6... 1022) and are for information only.
Support for moving /128 IPv6 Prefixes and /32 IPv4 Prefixes The software supports a command to program IPv6 /128 route prefixes in the route table. You can define IPv6 /128 route prefixes in the route table using the ipv6 unicast-host-routecommand. You can also define IPv4 /32 route prefixes in the host table using the ipv4 unicast-host-routecommand. RTAG7 RTAG7 is a hashing algorithm that load balances the traffic within a trunk group in a controlled manner.
• RTAG7 hashing also provides options to select between multiple hash algorithms that would result in balanced traffic distribution for various traffic patterns.
Figure 39. Before Polarization Effect Router B performs the same hash as router A and all the traffic goes through the same path to router D, while no traffic is redirected to router E. Some of the anti-polarization techniques used generally to mitigate unequal traffic distribution in LAG/ECMP as follows: 1. Configuring different hash-seed values at each node - Hash seed is the primary parameter in hash computations that determine distribution of traffic among the ECMP paths.
xor8 of xor8 xor16 CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR8 - Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits CR16 - 16 bit XOR] Example to view show hash-algorithm: DellEMC(conf)#hash-algorithm ecmp flow-based-hashing crc16 DellEMC(conf)#end DellEMC#show hash-algorithm Hash-Algorithm linecard 0 Port-Set 0 Seed 185270328 Hg-Seed 185282673 EcmpFlowBasedHashingAlgo- crc16 EcmpAlgo- crc32MSB LagAlgo- crc32LSB HgAlgo- crc16 Figure 40.
15 FIP Snooping The Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Transit feature is supported on Ethernet interfaces. When you enable the switch for FCoE transit, the switch functions as a FIP snooping bridge. NOTE: FIP snooping is not supported on Fibre Channel interfaces or in a switch stack.
Table 30. FIP Functions FIP Function Description FIP VLAN discovery FCoE devices (ENodes) discover the FCoE VLANs on which to transmit and receive FIP and FCoE traffic. FIP discovery FCoE end-devices and FCFs are automatically discovered. Initialization FCoE devices learn ENodes from the FLOGI and FDISC to allow immediate login and create a virtual link with an FCoE switch. Maintenance A valid virtual link between an FCoE device and an FCoE switch is maintained and the LOGO functions properly.
Port-based ACLs These ACLs are applied on all three port modes: on ports directly connected to an FCF, server-facing ENode ports, and bridge-to-bridge links. Port-based ACLs take precedence over global ACLs. FCoE-generated ACLs These take precedence over user-configured ACLs. A user-configured ACL entry cannot deny FCoE and FIP snooping frames. The following illustration shows a switch used as a FIP snooping bridge in a converged Ethernet network.
• Process FIP VLAN discovery requests and responses, advertisements, solicitations, FLOGI/FDISC requests and responses, FLOGO requests and responses, keep-alive packets, and clear virtual-link messages. Using FIP Snooping There are four steps to configure FCoE transit. 1. 2. 3. 4. Enable the FCoE transit feature on a switch. Enable FIP snooping globally on all Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) or individual VLANs on a FIP snooping bridge.
CAM ACL Table -- Chassis Cam ACL -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 0 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 0 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 EtsAcl : 1 FcoeAcl : 2 iscsiOptAcl : 2 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 -- stack-unit 1 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 0 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 0 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 EtsAcl : 1 FcoeAcl : 2 iscsiOptAcl : 2 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0
• • You must configure at least one interface for FCF (FCoE Forwarder) mode on a FIP snooping-enabled VLAN. You can configure multiple FCF trusted interfaces in a VLAN. A maximum of eight VLANS are supported for FIP snooping on the switch. When enabled globally, FIP snooping processes FIP packets in traffic only from the first eight incoming VLANs. When enabled on a per-VLAN basis, FIP snooping is supported on up to eight VLANs.
FIP Snooping Restrictions The following restrictions apply when you configure FIP snooping. • • • • The maximum number of FCoE VLANs supported on the switch is eight. The maximum number of FIP snooping sessions supported per ENode server is 32. To increase the maximum number of sessions to 64, use the fip-snooping max-sessions-per-enodemac command. The maximum number of FCFs supported per FIP snooping-enabled VLAN is twelve.
Command Output clear fip-snooping statistics [interface vlan vlan-id | interface port-type port/slot | interface port-channel port-channel-number] Clears the statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all VLANs, a specified VLAN, or a specified port interface. show fip-snooping system Displays information on the status of FIP snooping on the switch (enabled or disabled), including the number of FCoE VLANs, FCFs, ENodes, and currently active sessions.
The following table describes the show fip-snooping enode command fields. Table 34. show fip-snooping enode Command Description Field Description ENode MAC MAC address of the ENode. ENode Interface Slot/port number of the interface connected to the ENode. FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF. VLAN VLAN ID number used by the session. FC-ID Fibre Channel session ID assigned by the FCF. The following example shows the show fip-snooping fcf command.
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of Vlan Notifications Multicast Discovery Solicits Unicast Discovery Solicits FLOGI FDISC FLOGO Enode Keep Alive VN Port Keep Alive Multicast Discovery Advertisement Unicast Discovery Advertisement FLOGI Accepts FLOGI Rejects FDISC Accepts FDISC Rejects FLOGO Accepts FLOGO Rejects CVL FCF Discovery Timeouts VN P
Field Description Number of ENode Keep Alives Number of FIP-snooped ENode keep-alive frames received on the interface. Number of VN Port Keep Alives Number of FIP-snooped VN port keep-alive frames received on the interface. Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisements Number of FIP-snooped multicast discovery advertisements received on the interface. Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisements Number of FIP-snooped unicast discovery advertisements received on the interface.
FCoE Transit Configuration Example The following illustration shows a switch used as a FIP snooping bridge for FCoE traffic between an ENode (server blade) and an FCF (ToR switch). The ToR switch operates as an FCF and FCoE gateway. Figure 43. Configuration Example: FIP Snooping on a Switch In this example, DCBx and PFC are enabled on the FIP snooping bridge and on the FCF ToR switch.
DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)# protocol lldp DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1-lldp)# dcbx port-role auto-downstream NOTE: A port is enabled by default for bridge-ENode links.
16 Flex Hash and Optimized Boot-Up This chapter describes the Flex Hash and fast-boot enhancements. Topics: • • • • • • • Flex Hash Capability Overview Configuring the Flex Hash Mechanism Configuring Fast Boot and LACP Fast Switchover Optimizing the Boot Time Interoperation of Applications with Fast Boot and System States RDMA Over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) Overview Preserving 802.
To delete the configured flex hash setting, use the no version of the command. Configuring Fast Boot and LACP Fast Switchover Configure the optimized booting time functionality by performing the following steps. 1. Enable the system to restart with optimized booting-time functionality enabled. CONFIGURATION mode DellEMC(conf)#reload-type fastboot 2. Configure fast boot on a port-channel on both the nodes that are members of a port-channel in order to enable the physical ports to be aggregated faster.
3. Before performing the planned reload, we recommend that the IPv6 Neighbor Discovery (ND) reachable timer is increased to a value of 300 seconds or longer on the adjacent devices to prevent the ND cache entries from becoming stale and being removed while the ToR goes through a CPU reset. This timer can be restored to its prior value after the ToR has completed its planned reload. 4.
• The system saves all the dynamic ND cache entries to a database on the flash card.
Changes to BGP Multipath When the system becomes active after a fast-boot restart, a change has been made to the BGP multipath and ECMP behavior. The system delays the computation and installation of additional paths to a destination into the BGP routing information base (RIB) and forwarding table for a certain period of time.
To provide lossless service for RRoCE, the QoS service policy must be configured in the ingress and egress directions on lite sub interfaces. Preserving 802.1Q VLAN Tag Value for Lite Subinterfaces This functionality is supported on the platform. All the frames in a Layer 2 VLAN are identified using a tag defined in the IEEE 802.1Q standard to determine the VLAN to which the frames or traffic are relevant or associated. Such frames are encapsulated with the 802.1Q tags.
17 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP provides fast network convergence to Layer 2 switches interconnected in a ring topology, such as a metropolitan area network (MAN) or large campuses. FRRP is similar to what can be achieved with the spanning tree protocol (STP), though even with optimizations, STP can take up to 50 seconds to converge (depending on the size of network and node of failure) and may require 4 to 5 seconds to reconverge.
Ring Status The ring failure notification and the ring status checks provide two ways to ensure the ring remains up and active in the event of a switch or port failure. Ring Checking At specified intervals, the Master node sends a ring health frame (RHF) through the ring. If the ring is complete, the frame is received on its secondary port and the Master node resets its fail-period timer and continues normal operation.
Figure 44. Example of Multiple Rings Connected by Single Switch Important FRRP Points FRRP provides a convergence time that can generally range between 150ms and 1500ms for Layer 2 networks. The Master node originates a high-speed frame that circulates around the ring. This frame, appropriately, sets up or breaks down the ring. • • • • • • • • • • The Master node transmits ring status check frames at specified intervals. You can run multiple physical rings on the same switch.
Important FRRP Concepts The following table lists some important FRRP concepts. Concept Explanation Ring ID Each ring has a unique 8-bit ring ID through which the ring is identified (for example, FRRP 101 and FRRP 202, as shown in the illustration in Member VLAN Spanning Two Rings Connected by One Switch. Control VLAN Each ring has a unique Control VLAN through which tagged ring health frames (RHF) are sent. Control VLANs are used only for sending RHF, and cannot be used for any other purpose.
• Each ring has only one Master node; all others are transit nodes. FRRP Configuration These are the tasks to configure FRRP.
• • For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information. For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the stack/slot/port information. 3. Assign the Primary and Secondary ports and the control VLAN for the ports on the ring. CONFIG-FRRP mode.
• • • • For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information. For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the stack/slot/port[/subport] information. For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information. For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the stack/slot/port information. VLAN ID: Identification number of the Control VLAN. 4.
EXEC or EXEC PRIVELEGED mode. show frrp ring-id • Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Show the state of all FRRP groups. EXEC or EXEC PRIVELEGED mode. show frrp summary Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Troubleshooting FRRP To troubleshoot FRRP, use the following information. Configuration Checks • • • • • Each Control Ring must use a unique VLAN ID. Only two interfaces on a switch can be Members of the same control VLAN. There can be only one Master node for any FRRP group.
! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/2 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1,1/1/2/2 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1, 1/1/2/2 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 secondary TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/2 controlvlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode transit no disable Example of R3 TRANSIT interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/4/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! i
Figure 45. FRRP Ring Connecting VLT Devices You can also configure an FRRP ring where both the VLT peers are connected to the FRRP ring and the VLTi acts as the primary interface for the FRRP Master and transit nodes. This active-active FRRP configuration blocks the FRRP ring on a per VLAN or VLAN group basis enabling the configuration to spawn across different set of VLANs.
multiple member VLANS are configured (for example, M1 to M10) that carry the data traffic across the FRRP rings. The secondary port P2 is tagged to the control VLAN (V1). VLTi is implicitly tagged to the member VLANs when these VLANs are configured in the VLT peer. As a result of the VLT Node2 configuration on R2, the secondary interface P2 is blocked for the member VLANs (M11 to Mn). Following figure illustrated the FRRP Ring R1 topology: Figure 46.
18 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) VLAN registration protocol (GVRP), defined by the IEEE 802.1q specification, is a Layer 2 network protocol that provides for automatic VLAN configuration of switches. GVRP-compliant switches use GARP to register and deregister attribute values, such as VLAN IDs, with each other.
Figure 47. Global GVRP Configuration Example Basic GVRP configuration is a two-step process: 1. Enabling GVRP Globally 2. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface Related Configuration Tasks • • Configure GVRP Registration Configure a GARP Timer Enabling GVRP Globally To configure GVRP globally, use the following command. • Enable GVRP for the entire switch.
To inspect the global configuration, use the show gvrp brief command. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface To enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface, use the following command. • Enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface.
• • Leave — When a GARP device expects to de-register a piece of attribute information, it sends out a Leave message and starts this timer. If a Join message does not arrive before the timer expires, the information is de-registered. The Leave timer must be greater than or equal to 3x the Join timer. The Dell EMC Networking OS default is 600ms. LeaveAll — After startup, a GARP device globally starts a LeaveAll timer.
19 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Internet group management protocol (IGMP) is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group. Multicast is premised on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address; hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group. Multicast routing protocols (such as protocol-independent multicast [PIM]) use the information in IGMP messages to discover which groups are active and to populate the multicast routing table.
Figure 48. IGMP Messages in IP Packets Join a Multicast Group There are two ways that a host may join a multicast group: it may respond to a general query from its querier or it may send an unsolicited report to its querier. Responding to an IGMP Query The following describes how a host can join a multicast group. 1. One router on a subnet is elected as the querier. The querier periodically multicasts (to all-multicast-systems address 224.0.0.1) a general query to all hosts on the subnet. 2.
• • To enable filtering, routers must keep track of more state information, that is, the list of sources that must be filtered. An additional query type, the Group-and-Source-Specific Query, keeps track of state changes, while the Group-Specific and General queries still refresh the existing state.
3. The host’s third message indicates that it is only interested in traffic from sources 10.11.1.1 and 10.11.1.2. Because this request again prevents all other sources from reaching the subnet, the router sends another group-and-source query so that it can satisfy all other hosts. There are no other interested hosts so the request is recorded. Figure 51.
Figure 52. Membership Queries: Leaving and Staying Configure IGMP Configuring IGMP is a two-step process. 1. Enable multicast routing using the ip multicast-routing command. 2. Enable a multicast routing protocol.
• View IGMP-enabled IPv4 interfaces. • EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp interface View IGMP-enabled IPv6 interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 mld interface DellEMC#show ip igmp interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 Inbound IGMP access group is not set Internet address is 165.87.34.
Viewing IGMP Groups To view both learned and statically configured IGMP groups, use the following command. • View both learned and statically configured IGMP groups. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp groups show ipv6 mld groups DellEMC#show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime Expires Last Reporter 225.1.1.1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 IGMPV2 00:11:19 00:01:50 165.87.34.100 225.1.2.
• Interface mode ipv6 mld query-max-response-time Adjust the last member query interval. • INTERFACE mode ip igmp last-member-query-interval Adjust the amount of time the querier waits, for the initial query response, before sending the next IPv6 query. Interface mode ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval Enabling IGMP Immediate-Leave If the querier does not receive a response to a group-specific or group-and-source query, it sends another (querier robustness value).
• CONFIGURATION mode show running-config Disable snooping on a VLAN.
show ip igmp snooping mrouter Configuring the Switch as Querier To configure the switch as a querier, use the following command. Hosts that do not support unsolicited reporting wait for a general query before sending a membership report. When the multicast source and receivers are in the same VLAN, multicast traffic is not routed and so there is no querier. Configure the switch to be the querier for a VLAN so that hosts send membership reports and the switch can generate a forwarding table by snooping.
Traffic (switch initiated management traffic or responses to switch-destined traffic with management port IP address as the source IP address) for user-specified management protocols must exit out of the management port. In this chapter, all the references to traffic indicate switch-initiated traffic and responses to switch-destined traffic with management port IP address as the source IP address.
Enabling and Disabling Management Egress Interface Selection You can enable or disable egress-interface-selection using the management egress-interface-selection command. NOTE: Egress Interface Selection (EIS) works only with IPv4 routing. When the feature is enabled using the management egress-interface-selection command, the following events are performed: • • • • • • • • • • • • • The CLI prompt changes to the EIS mode.
• • • • • • • • • • • • TCP/UDP port number is extracted from the sockaddr structure in the in_selectsrc call which is called as part of the connect system call or in the ip_output function. If the destination TCP/UDP port number belongs to a configured management application, then sin_port of destination sockaddr structure is set to Management EIS ID 2 so that route lookup can be done in the management EIS routing table.
Handling of Transit Traffic (Traffic Separation) This is forwarded traffic where destination IP is not an IP address configured in the switch. • • • Packets received on the management port with destination on the front-end port is dropped. Packets received on the front-end port with destination on the management port is dropped. A separate drop counter is incremented for this case. This counter is viewed using the netstat command, like all other IP layer counters.
2. Non-Management Applications (Applications that are not configured as management applications as defined by this feature): Non-management application traffic exits out of either front-end data port or management port based on routing table. If there is a default route on both the management and front-end data port, the default for the data port is preferred route.
EIS behavior for ICMP: ICMP packets do not have TCP/UDP ports. In this case, to perform an EIS route lookup for ICMP-based applications (ping and traceroute), you must configure ICMP as a management application. If the management port is down or the route lookup fails, packets are dropped. If source IP address does not match the management port IP address route lookup is done in the default routing table.
20 Interfaces This chapter describes interface types, both physical and logical, and how to configure them with Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS). The system supports 10–Gigabit, 25–Gigabit, 40–Gigbit, 50–Gigabit, and 100–Gigabit QSFP 28 interfaces. NOTE: Only Dell-qualified optics are supported on these interfaces. Non-Dell optics for 40–Gigbit, 25–Gigabit, 50– Gigabit, and 100–Gigabit are set to error-disabled state.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Splitting 100G Ports Link Dampening Link Bundle Monitoring Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control Configure the MTU Size on an Interface Port-Pipes CR4 Auto-Negotiation FEC Configuration Setting the Speed of Ethernet Interfaces Syslog Warning Upon Connecting SFP28 Optics with QSA Adjusting the Keepalive Timer View Advanced Interface Information Configuring the Traffic Sampling Size Globally Dynamic Counters Enhanced Validation of Interface Ranges Compressing Configurat
Pluggable media present, QSFP28 type is 100GBASE-CR4-1M Wavelength is 38nm Interface index is 2099716 Internet address is 10.10.10.
no ip address shutdown ! interface hundredGigE 1/1/3 no ip address shutdown ! interface hundredGigE 1/1/4 no ip address shutdown Resetting an Interface to its Factory Default State You can reset the configurations applied on an interface to its factory default state. To reset the configuration, perform the following steps: 1. View the configurations applied on an interface.
INTERFACE mode no shutdown To confirm that the interface is enabled, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. To leave INTERFACE mode, use the exit command or end command. You cannot delete a physical interface. Physical Interfaces The Management Ethernet interface is a single RJ-45 Fast Ethernet port on a switch. The interface provides dedicated management access to the system.
Configuring Layer 2 (Data Link) Mode Do not configure switching or Layer 2 protocols such as spanning tree protocol (STP) on an interface unless the interface has been set to Layer 2 mode. To set Layer 2 data transmissions through an individual interface, use the following command. • Enable Layer 2 data transmissions through an individual interface.
To determine the configuration of an interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode or the various show interface commands in EXEC mode. Configuring Layer 3 (Interface) Mode To assign an IP address, use the following commands. • Enable the interface. • INTERFACE mode no shutdown Configure a primary IP address and mask on the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] The ip-address must be in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D) and the mask must be in slash format (/xx).
Following is the sample syslog displayed when the recovery action is complete: May 8 17:21:57 %STKUNIT1-M:CP %IFMGR-5-ERR_DIS_RECOVERY_COMPLETE: Error Disable Recovery timer expired for interface Gi 2/18. Configuring an automatic recovery for an Err-disabled interface To configure automatic Err-disabled recovery of an interface and time-out interval, use the following commands. 1. Configure automatic recovery of an interface from Err-disabled state based on the cause.
Configuring EIS EIS is compatible with the following protocols: DNS, FTP, NTP, RADIUS, sFlow, SNMP, SSH, Syslog, TACACS, Telnet, and TFTP. To enable and configure EIS, use the following commands: 1. Enter EIS mode. CONFIGURATION mode management egress-interface-selection 2. Configure which applications uses EIS.
Internet address is 10.16.130.
Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:cc:cc:ce Current address is 00:01:e8:cc:cc:ce Pluggable media not present Interface index is 46449666 Internet address is 10.11.131.
NOTE: You cannot assign an IP address to the default VLAN, which is VLAN 1 (by default). To assign another VLAN ID to the default VLAN, use the default vlan-id vlan-id command. To assign an IP address to an interface, use the following command. • Configure an IP address and mask on the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] • • ip-address mask: enter an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash format (/24).
CONFIGURATION mode Use the port-delay-restore command and ensure to specify a value between 1 second and 300 seconds. DellEMC(conf)#port-delay-restore 300 Use the no port-delay-restore command to disable the feature. DellEMC(conf)#no port-delay-restore If you would like to turn this feature off for an individual interface, enter the INTERFACE mode and use the no port-delay-restore command.
Member ports of a LAG are added and programmed into the hardware in a predictable order based on the port ID, instead of in the order in which the ports come up. With this implementation, load balancing yields predictable results across device reloads. A physical interface can belong to only one port channel at a time. Each port channel must contain interfaces of the same interface type/speed. Port channels can contain a mix of 1G/10G/25G/40G/50G/100G.
Adding a Physical Interface to a Port Channel The physical interfaces in a port channel can be on any line card in the chassis, but must be the same physical type. NOTE: Port channels can contain a mix of Ethernet interfaces, but Dell EMC Networking OS disables the interfaces that are not the same speed of the first channel member in the port channel (refer to 10/100/1000 Mbps Interfaces in Port Channels). You can add any physical interface to a port channel if the interface configuration is minimal.
42 CRC, 0 IP Checksum, 0 overrun, 0 discarded 2456590833 packets output, 203958235255 bytes, 0 underruns Output 1640 Multicasts, 56612 Broadcasts, 2456532581 Unicasts 2456590654 IP Packets, 0 Vlans, 0 MPLS 0 throttles, 0 discarded Rate info (interval 5 minutes): Input 00.01Mbits/sec, 2 packets/sec Output 81.
channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/8/1 shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-po-3)# Configuring the Minimum Oper Up Links in a Port Channel You can configure the minimum links in a port channel (LAG) that must be in “oper up” status to consider the port channel to be in “oper up” status. To set the “oper up” status of your links, use the following command. • Enter the number of links in a LAG that must be in “oper up” status. INTERFACE mode minimum-links number The default is 1.
EXEC mode DellEMC(conf)# interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#switchport DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# vlan tagged 2-5,100,4010 DellEMC#show interfaces switchport te 1/1/1 Codes: U x G i - Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged GVRP tagged, M - Trunk, H - VSN tagged Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged Name: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 802.
Load-Balancing Method By default, LAG hashing uses the source IP, destination IP, source transmission control protocol (TCP)/user datagram protocol (UDP) port, and destination TCP/UDP port for hash computation. For packets without a Layer 3 header, Dell EMC Networking OS automatically uses load-balance mac source-dest-mac. Do not configure IP hashing or MAC hashing at the same time.
• • • • • • • • crc-upper — uses the upper 32 bits of the hash key to compute the egress port. dest-ip — uses destination IP address as part of the hash key. lsb — uses the least significant bit of the hash key to compute the egress port. xor1 — uses Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor1 xor2 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor2 xor4 —Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor4 xor8 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor8 xor16 — uses 16 bit XOR.
Create a Single-Range The following is an example of a single range.
Add Ranges The following example shows how to use commas to add VLAN and port-channel interfaces to the range.
• • • • • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the stack/slot/port/subport information. For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information. For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the stack/slot/port[/subport] information. For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information.
The following example shows that when you split an interface on a 16X40G module, the subsequent even numbered interface is removed from the configuration. DellEMC(conf)# stack-unit [stack-unit number] module [module number] port [port number] portmode quad speed 10G Warning: Enabling Quad mode on stack-unit 1 module 3 port 1. Please verify whether the configs related to interface Fo 1/3/1 Fo 1/3/2 are cleaned up before proceeding further.
CONFIGURATION Mode stack-unit stack-unit-number module module-number port number portmode quad speed 25G • • • stack-unit-number: enter the stack member unit identifier on which the port resides. module module-number: enter the keyword module then the module number to specify the optional module in which the port is present. • number: enter the port number of the 100G port to be split. The range is from 1 to 8. Split a 100G port into one 40G ports.
Important Points to Remember • • • • Link dampening is not supported on VLAN interfaces. Link dampening is disabled when the interface is configured for port monitoring. You can apply link dampening to Layer 2 and Layer 3 interfaces. You can configure link dampening on individual interfaces in a LAG. Configuration Example of Link Dampening The figure shows a how link dampening works in a sample scenario when an interface is configured with dampening.
Figure 53. Interface State Change Consider an interface periodically flaps as shown above. Every time the interface goes down, a penalty (1024) is added. In the above example, during the first interface flap (flap 1), the penalty is added to 1024. And, the accumulated penalty will exponentially decay based on the set half-life, which is set as 10 seconds in the above example. During the second interface flap (flap 2), again the penalty (1024) is accumulated.
Enabling Link Dampening To enable link dampening, use the following command. • Enable link dampening. INTERFACE mode dampening To view the link dampening configuration on an interface, use the show config command. R1(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 ip address 10.10.19.1/24 dampening 1 2 3 4 no shutdown To view dampening information on all or specific dampened interfaces, use the show interfaces dampening command from EXEC Privilege mode.
Configure MTU Size on an Interface In Dell EMC Networking OS, Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is defined as the entire Ethernet packet (Ethernet header + FCS + payload). The following table lists the range for each transmission media. Transmission Media MTU Range (in bytes) Ethernet 594-12000 = link MTU 576-9234 = IP MTU Link Bundle Monitoring Monitoring linked LAG bundles allows traffic distribution amounts in a link to be monitored for unfair distribution at any given time.
Control how the system responds to and generates 802.3x pause frames on Ethernet interfaces. The default is rx off tx off. INTERFACE mode. flowcontrol rx [off | on] tx [off | on]| [monitor session-ID] Where: rx on: Processes the received flow control frames on this port. rx off: Ignores the received flow control frames on this port. tx on: Sends control frames from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received.
Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for port channels and VLANs are as follows. Port Channels: • • All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value. The port channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members. For example, if the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000, the port channel’s MTU values cannot be higher than 2100 for link MTU or 2000 bytes for IP MTU.
FEC Configuration FEC configurations are available on 100–Gigbit, 50–Gigabit and 25–Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. To configure FEC, use the following commands. • Enable FEC. INTERFACE mode fec enable The CL91 keyword enables RS-FEC on 100G interfaces as per IEEE. The system displays an error message when this is applied on 25G or 50G interfaces. The CL74 keyword enables BaseR-FEC on 25G or 50G interfaces as per 25G/50G Ethernet Consortium.
0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded 669 FEC bit errors, 172 FEC uncorrected code words Output Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.
Te 1/2/4 Fo 1/3 Fo 1/4 Fo 1/5 [output omitted] Up Down Down Down 10000 40000 40000 Auto Mbit Mbit Mbit Mbit Full Auto Auto Auto 2-5 ---- In the previous example, several ports display “Auto” in the Speed field. In the following example, the speed of port 1/1 is set to 100Mb and then its auto-negotiation is disabled.
The following example lists the possible show commands that have the configured keyword available: DellEMC#show DellEMC#show DellEMC#show DellEMC#show DellEMC#show DellEMC#show DellEMC#show DellEMC#show DellEMC#show DellEMC#show DellEMC#show DellEMC#show DellEMC#show DellEMC#show interfaces configured interfaces stack-unit 1 configured interfaces tengigabitEthernet 1 configured interfaces fortyGigE 1 configured ip interface configured ip interface stack-unit 1 configured ip interface tengigabitEthernet 1 c
0 packets input, 0 bytes Input 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans 0 MPLS 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts Received 0 input symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 IP Checksum, 0 overrun, 0 discarded 0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 underruns Output 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans, 0 MPLS 0 throttles, 0 discarded Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.
Medium is MultiRate, Wavelength is 850nm SFP+ receive power reading is -36.
NOTE: If you enable more than four counter-dependent applications on a port pipe, there is an impact on line rate performance. The following counter-dependent applications are supported by Dell EMC Networking OS: • • • • • • • • • • • Egress VLAN Ingress VLAN Next Hop 2 Next Hop 1 Egress ACLs ILM IP FLOW IP ACL IP FIB L2 ACL L2 FIB Clearing Interface Counters The counters in the show interfaces command are reset by the clear counters command.
Compressing Configuration Files You can optimize and reduce the sizes of the configuration files. You can compress the running configuration by grouping all the VLANs and the physical interfaces with the same property. Support to store the operating configuration to the startup config in the compressed mode and to perform an image downgrade without any configuration loss are provided. You can create groups of VLANs using the interface group command.
Uncompressed Compressed interface Vlan 2 ! no ip address no shutdown Compressed config size – 27 lines. ! interface Vlan 3 tagged te 1/1/1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 4 tagged te 1/1/1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 5 tagged te 1/1/1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address no shutdown ! interface Vlan 1000 ip address 1.1.1.
21 IPv4 Routing The Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) supports various IP addressing features. This chapter describes the basics of domain name service (DNS), address resolution protocol (ARP), and routing principles and their implementation in the Dell EMC Networking OS.
IP Addresses Dell EMC Networking OS supports IP version 4 (as described in RFC 791), classful routing, and variable length subnet masks (VLSM). With VLSM, you can configure one network with different masks. Supernetting, which increases the number of subnets, is also supported. To subnet, you add a mask to the IP address to separate the network and host portions of the IP address.
ip address ip-address mask [secondary] • • ip-address mask: the IP address must be in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash prefix-length format (/24). secondary: add the keyword secondary if the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. You can configure up to eight secondary IP addresses. To view the configuration, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode or use the show ip interface command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the second example.
Direct, Lo 0 --More-Dell EMC Networking OS installs a next hop that is on the directly connected subnet of current IP address on the interface. Dell EMC Networking OS also installs a next hop that is not on the directly connected subnet but which recursively resolves to a next hop on the interface's configured subnet. • • • • When the interface goes down, Dell EMC Networking OS withdraws the route. When the interface comes up, Dell EMC Networking OS re-installs the route.
To view the configured static routes for the management port, use the show ip management-route command in EXEC privilege mode. DellEMC#show ip management-route Destination ----------10.16.0.0/16 172.16.1.0/24 Gateway ------ManagementEthernet 1/1 10.16.151.
Configure the source to send the configured source interface IP address instead of using its front-end IP address in the ICMP unreachable messages and in the traceroute command output. Use the ip icmp source-interface interface or the ipv6 icmp source-interface interface commands in Configuration mode to enable the ICMP error messages to be sent with the source interface IP address. This functionality is supported on loopback, VLAN, port channel, and physical interfaces for IPv4 and IPv6 messages.
Enabling Dynamic Resolution of Host Names By default, dynamic resolution of host names (DNS) is disabled. To enable DNS, use the following commands. • Enable dynamic resolution of host names. • CONFIGURATION mode ip domain-lookup Specify up to six name servers. CONFIGURATION mode ip name-server ip-address [ip-address2 ... ip-address6] The order you entered the servers determines the order of their use. To view current bindings, use the show hosts command.
CONFIGURATION mode ip name-server ip-address [ip-address2 ... ip-address6] • The order you entered the servers determines the order of their use. When you enter the traceroute command without specifying an IP address (Extended Traceroute), you are prompted for a target and source IP address, timeout in seconds (default is 5), a probe count (default is 3), minimum TTL (default is 1), maximum TTL (default is 30), and port number (default is 33434).
CONFIGURATION mode arp vrf vrf-name ip-address mac-address interface • • • • vrf vrf-name: use the VRF option to configure a static ARP on that particular VRF. ip-address: IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). mac-address: MAC address in nnnn.nnnn.nnnn format. interface: enter the interface type slot/port information. These entries do not age and can only be removed manually. To remove a static ARP entry, use the no arp ip-address command.
• • inform switches of their presence on a port so that packets can be forwarded update the ARP table of other nodes on the network in case of an address change In the request, the host uses its own IP address in the Sender Protocol Address and Target Protocol Address fields. Enabling ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP To enable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, use the following command. • Enable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP.
Configuring ARP Retries You can configure the number of ARP retries. The default backoff interval remains at 20 seconds. To set and display ARP retries, use the following commands. • Set the number of ARP retries. CONFIGURATION mode arp retries number The default is 5. • The range is from 1 to 20. Set the exponential timer for resending unresolved ARPs. CONFIGURATION mode arp backoff-time The default is 30. • The range is from 1 to 3600. Display all ARP entries learned via gratuitous ARP.
host an ICMP redirect message with the better route. The gateway router routes the packet to its destination and the host sends subsequent packets to that particular destination through the correct router. Dell EMC Networking OS supports both ICMP and ICMP6 redirect messages. The following diagram depicts a topology in which ICMP redirect messages are useful. Figure 56. ICMP Redirect Host H is connected to the same Ethernet segment as SW1 and SW2.
• • You may specify a maximum of 16 UDP ports. UDP helper is compatible with IP helper (ip helper-address): • • UDP broadcast traffic with port number 67 or 68 are unicast to the dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) server per the ip helper-address configuration whether or not the UDP port list contains those ports. If the UDP port list contains ports 67 or 68, UDP broadcast traffic is forwarded on those ports. Enabling UDP Helper To enable UDP helper, use the following command.
Figure 57. UDP Helper with Broadcast-All Addresses UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses When the destination IP address of an incoming packet matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the system changes the address to the configured broadcast address and sends it to matching interface. In the following illustration, Packet 1 has the destination IP address 1.1.1.255, which matches the subnet broadcast address of VLAN 101.
Figure 59. UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses The following describes UDP helper with no broadcast addresses configured. • • If the incoming packet has a broadcast destination IP address, the unaltered packet is routed to all Layer 3 interfaces. If the Incoming packet has a destination IP address that matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the unaltered packet is routed to the matching interfaces.
22 IPv6 Routing Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) routing is the successor to IPv4. Due to the rapid growth in internet users and IP addresses, IPv4 is reaching its maximum usage. IPv6 will eventually replace IPv4 usage to allow for the constant expansion. This chapter provides a brief description of the differences between IPv4 and IPv6, and the Dell EMC Networking support of IPv6. This chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive description of IPv6.
• Prefix Renumbering — Useful in transparent renumbering of hosts in the network when an organization changes its service provider. NOTE: As an alternative to stateless autoconfiguration, network hosts can obtain their IPv6 addresses using the dynamic host control protocol (DHCP) servers via stateful auto-configuration. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking OS provides the flexibility to add prefixes on Router Advertisements (RA) to advertise responses to Router Solicitations (RS).
To support /65 – /128 IPv6 route prefix entries, Dell EMC Networking OS needs to be programmed with /65 - /128 bit IPv6 support. The number of entries as well needs to be explicitly programmed. This number can be1K, 2K, or 3K granularity. On the system, for IPv6 /65 to /128 will consume the same storage banks which is used by the L3_DEFIP table. Once the IPv6 128 bit is enabled, number of entries in L3_DEFIP will be reduced. LPM partitioning will take effect after reboot of the box.
Payload Length (16 bits) The Payload Length field specifies the packet payload. This is the length of the data following the IPv6 header. IPv6 Payload Length only includes the data following the header, not the header itself. The Payload Length limit of 2 bytes requires that the maximum packet payload be 64 KB. However, the Jumbogram option type Extension header supports larger packet sizes when required. Next Header (8 bits) The Next Header field identifies the next header’s type.
However, if the Destination Address is a Hop-by-Hop options header, the Extension header is examined by every forwarding router along the packet’s route. The Hop-by-Hop options header must immediately follow the IPv6 header, and is noted by the value 0 (zero) in the Next Header field. Extension headers are processed in the order in which they appear in the packet header. Hop-by-Hop Options Header The Hop-by-Hop options header contains information that is examined by every router along the packet’s path.
For example, 2001:0db8:1234::/48 stands for the network with addresses 2001:0db8:1234:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000 through 2001:0db8:1234:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff. Link-local Addresses Link-local addresses, starting with fe80:, are assigned only in the local link area. The addresses are generated usually automatically by the operating system's IP layer for each network interface.
Figure 61. Path MTU discovery process IPv6 Neighbor Discovery The IPv6 neighbor discovery protocol (NDP) is a top-level protocol for neighbor discovery on an IPv6 network. In place of address resolution protocol (ARP), NDP uses “Neighbor Solicitation” and “Neighbor Advertisement” ICMPv6 messages for determining relationships between neighboring nodes.
Figure 62. NDP Router Redirect IPv6 Neighbor Discovery of MTU Packets You can set the MTU advertised through the RA packets to incoming routers, without altering the actual MTU setting on the interface. The ipv6 nd mtu command sets the value advertised to routers. It does not set the actual MTU rate. For example, if you set ipv6 nd mtu to 1280, the interface still passes 1500-byte packets, if that is what is set with the mtu command.
Debugging IPv6 RDNSS Information Sent to the Host To verify that the IPv6 RDNSS information sent to the host is configured correctly, use the debug ipv6 nd command in EXEC Privilege mode. Example of Debugging IPv6 RDNSS Information Sent to the Host The following example debugs IPv6 RDNSS information sent to the host.
To display IPv6 RDNSS information, use the show configuration command in INTERFACE CONFIG mode. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#show configuration The following example uses the show configuration command to display IPv6 RDNSS information.
• EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show cam-acl Provides information on FP groups allocated for the egress acl. CONFIGURATION mode show cam-acl-egress Allocate at least one group for L2ACL and IPv4 ACL. The total number of groups is 4. Assigning an IPv6 Address to an Interface Essentially, IPv6 is enabled in Dell EMC Networking OS simply by assigning IPv6 addresses to individual router interfaces. You can use IPv6 and IPv4 together on a system, but be sure to differentiate that usage carefully.
• • For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number. For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Configuring Telnet with IPv6 The Telnet client and server in Dell EMC Networking OS supports IPv6 connections. You can establish a Telnet session directly to the router using an IPv6 Telnet client, or you can initiate an IPv6 Telnet connection from the router. NOTE: Telnet to link local addresses is supported on the system.
• Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface. EXEC mode show ipv6 interface interface {slot/port[/subport]} Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information: • • • • • • • • • • For all brief summary of IPv6 status and configuration, enter the keyword brief. For all IPv6 configured interfaces, enter the keyword configured. For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the stack/slot/port/subport information.
• • To display information about static IPv6 routes, enter static. To display information about an IPv6 Prefix lists, enter list and the prefix-list name. The following example shows the show ipv6 route summary command. DellEMC#show ipv6 route summary Route Source Active Routes Non-active Routes connected 5 0 static 0 0 Total 5 0 The following example shows the show ipv6 route command.
no ip address ipv6 address 3:4:5:6::8/24 shutdown DellEMC# Clearing IPv6 Routes To clear routes from the IPv6 routing table, use the following command. • Clear (refresh) all or a specific route from the IPv6 routing table. EXEC mode clear ipv6 route {* | ipv6 address prefix-length} • • • *: all routes. ipv6 address: the format is x:x:x:x::x. mask: the prefix length is from 0 to 128.
5. Set the hop count limit. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode hop-limit {maximum | minimum limit} The hop limit range is from 0 to 254. 6. Set the managed address configuration flag. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode managed-config-flag {on | off} 7. Enable verification of the sender IPv6 address in inspected messages from the authorized device source access list. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode match ra{ipv6-access-list name | ipv6-prefix-list name | mac-access-list name} 8.
Configuring IPv6 RA Guard on an Interface To configure the IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) guard on an interface, perform the following steps: 1. Configure the terminal to enter the Interface mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface-type slot/port[/subport] 2. Apply the IPv6 RA guard to a specific interface. INTERFACE mode ipv6 nd ra-guard attach policy policy-name [vlan [vlan 1, vland 2, vlan 3.....]] 3. Display the configurations applied on all the RA guard policies or a specific RA guard policy.
23 iSCSI Optimization This chapter describes how to configure internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization, which enables quality-of-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI traffic.
This cannot be inferred as the maximum supported iSCSI sessions are reached. Also, number of iSCSI sessions displayed on the system may show any number equal to or less than the maximum. The following illustration shows iSCSI optimization between servers and a storage array in which a stack of three switches connect installed servers (iSCSI initiators) to a storage array (iSCSI targets) in a SAN network.
You can configure whether the iSCSI optimization feature uses the VLAN priority or IP DSCP mapping to determine the traffic class queue. By default, iSCSI flows are assigned to dot1p priority 4. To map incoming iSCSI traffic on an interface to a dot1p priority-queue other than 4, use the QoS dot1p-priority command (refer to QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment). Dell EMC Networking recommends setting the CoS dot1p priority-queue to 0 (zero).
The following message displays the first time a Dell EqualLogic array is detected and describes the configuration changes that are automatically performed: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-IFM_ISCSI_AUTO_CONFIG: This switch is being configured for optimal conditions to support iSCSI traffic which will cause some automatic configuration to occur including jumbo frames and flow-control on all ports; no storm control and spanning-tree port fast to be enabled on the port of detection.
Enable and Disable iSCSI Optimization The following describes enabling and disabling iSCSI optimizaiton. NOTE: iSCSI monitoring is disabled by default. iSCSI auto-configuration and auto-detection is enabled by default. If you enable iSCSI, flow control is automatically enabled on all interfaces. To disable flow control on all interfaces, use the no flow control rx on tx off command and save the configuration.
Configuring iSCSI Optimization To configure iSCSI optimization, use the following commands. 1. For a non-DCB environment: Enable session monitoring. CONFIGURATION mode cam-acl l2acl 4 ipv4acl 4 ipv6acl 0 ipv4qos 2 l2qos 1 l2pt 0 ipmacacl 0 vman-qos 0 fcoeacl 0 iscsioptacl 2 NOTE: Content addressable memory (CAM) allocation is optional.
• • dscp dscp-value: specifies the DSCP value assigned to incoming packets in an iSCSI session. The range is from 0 to 63. The default is: the DSCP value in ingress packets is not changed. remark: marks incoming iSCSI packets with the configured dot1p or DSCP value when they egress the switch. The default is: the dot1 and DSCP values in egress packets are not changed. 8. (Optional) Set the aging time for iSCSI session monitoring. CONFIGURATION mode [no] iscsi aging time time.
Target: iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:0-8a0906-0e70c2002-10a0018426a48c94-iom010 Initiator: iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:win-x9l8v27yajg ISID: 400001370000 VLT PEER2 Session 0: -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Target: iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:0-8a0906-0f60c2002-0360018428d48c94-iom011 iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:win-x9l8v27yajg ISID: 400001370000 The following example shows the show iscsi session detailed command.
24 Intermediate System to Intermediate System The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. Dell EMC Networking supports both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS.
Figure 64. ISO Address Format Multi-Topology IS-IS Multi-topology IS-IS (MT IS-IS) allows you to create multiple IS-IS topologies on a single router with separate databases. Use this feature to place a virtual physical topology into logical routing domains, which can each support different routing and security policies. All routers on a LAN or point-to-point must have at least one common supported topology when operating in Multi-Topology IS-IS mode.
Graceful Restart Graceful restart is a protocol-based mechanism that preserves the forwarding table of the restarting router and its neighbors for a specified period to minimize the loss of packets. A graceful-restart router does not immediately assume that a neighbor is permanently down and so does not trigger a topology change. Normally, when an IS-IS router is restarted, temporary disruption of routing occurs due to events in both the restarting router and the neighbors of the restarting router.
• Accepts external IPv6 information and advertises this information in the PDUs. The following table lists the default IS-IS values. Table 46.
1. Create an IS-IS routing process. CONFIGURATION mode router isis [tag] tag: (optional) identifies the name of the IS-IS process. 2. Configure an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for a routing process. ROUTER ISIS mode net network-entity-title Specify the area address and system ID for an IS-IS routing process. The last byte must be 00. For more information about configuring a NET, refer to IS-IS Addressing. 3. Enter the interface configuration mode.
Interfaces supported by IS-IS: Vlan 2 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 Loopback 0 Redistributing: Distance: 115 Generate narrow metrics: level-1-2 Accept narrow metrics: level-1-2 Generate wide metrics: none Accept wide metrics: none DellEMC# To view IS-IS protocol statistics, use the show isis traffic command in EXEC Privilege mode.
isis ipv6 metric metric-value [level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2] To configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be between 0 and 16,777,215. Configuring IS-IS Graceful Restart To enable IS-IS graceful restart globally, use the following commands. Additionally, you can implement optional commands to enable the graceful restart settings. • Enable graceful restart on ISIS processes.
Interval/Blackout time T3 Timer T3 Timeout Value T2 Timeout Value T1 Timeout Value Adjacency wait time : : : : : : Operational Timer Value ====================== Current Mode/State : T3 Time left : T2 Time left : Restart ACK rcv count : Restart Req rcv count : Suppress Adj rcv count : Restart CSNP rcv count : Database Sync count : 1 min Manual 30 30 (level-1), 30 (level-2) 5, retry count: 1 30 Normal/RUNNING 0 0 (level-1), 0 0 (level-1), 0 0 (level-1), 0 0 (level-1), 0 0 (level-1), 0 0 (level-1), 0 (le
ROUTER ISIS mode lsp-mtu size • • size: the range is from 128 to 9195. The default is 1497. Set the LSP refresh interval. ROUTER ISIS mode lsp-refresh-interval seconds • • seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 900 seconds. Set the maximum time LSPs lifetime. ROUTER ISIS mode max-lsp-lifetime seconds • seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 1200 seconds.
metric-style {narrow [transition] | transition | wide [transition]} [level-1 | level-2] The default is narrow. The default is Level 1 and Level 2 (level-1–2) To view which metric types are generated and received, use the show isis protocol command in EXEC Privilege mode. The IS-IS matrixes settings are in bold. Example of Viewing IS-IS Metric Types DellEMC#show isis protocol IS-IS Router: System Id: EEEE.EEEE.EEEE IS-Type: level-1-2 Manual area address(es): 47.0004.004d.
Configuring the Distance of a Route To configure the distance for a route, use the following command. • Configure the distance for a route. ROUTER ISIS mode distance Changing the IS-Type To change the IS-type, use the following commands. You can configure the system to act as a Level 1 router, a Level 1-2 router, or a Level 2 router. To change the IS-type for the router, use the following commands. • Configure IS-IS operating level for a router.
• • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Distribute Routes Another method of controlling routing information is to filter the information through a prefix list. Prefix lists are applied to incoming or outgoing routes and routes must meet the conditions of the prefix lists or Dell EMC Networking OS does not install the route in the routing table.
• • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the stack/slot/port[/subport] information. • For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information. • For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the stack/slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
Redistributing IPv6 Routes To add routes from other routing instances or protocols, use the following commands. NOTE: These commands apply to IPv6 IS-IS only. To apply prefix lists to IPv4 routes, use the ROUTER ISIS mode previously shown. • Include BGP, directly connected, RIP, or user-configured (static) routes in IS-IS.
Setting the Overload Bit Another use for the overload bit is to prevent other routers from using this router as an intermediate hop in their shortest path first (SPF) calculations. For example, if the IS-IS routing database is out of memory and cannot accept new LSPs, Dell EMC Networking OS sets the overload bit and IS-IS traffic continues to transit the system. To set or remove the overload bit manually, use the following commands. • Set the overload bit in LSPs.
• EXEC Privilege mode debug isis spf-triggers View sent and received LSPs. EXEC Privilege mode debug isis update-packets [interface] To view specific information, enter the following optional parameter: • interface: Enter the type of interface and slot/port information to view IS-IS information on that interface only. Dell EMC Networking OS displays debug messages on the console. To view which debugging commands are enabled, use the show debugging command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Table 48. Metric Value When the Metric Style Changes Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value wide narrow default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console. wide transition truncated value (the truncated value appears in the LSP only). The original isis metric value is displayed in the show config and show running-config commands and is used if you change back to transition metric style.
Beginning Metric Style Next Metric Style Resulting Metric Value Next Metric Style Final Metric Value wide transition transition truncated value wide transition original value is recovered wide transition truncated value narrow default value (10). A message is sent to the logging buffer wide transition transition truncated value narrow transition default value (10).
NOTE: Whenever you make IS-IS configuration changes, clear the IS-IS process (re-started) using the clear isis command. The clear isis command must include the tag for the ISIS process. The following example shows the response from the router: DellEMC#clear isis * % ISIS not enabled. DellEMC#clear isis 9999 * You can configure IPv6 IS-IS routes in one of the following three different methods: • • • Congruent Topology — You must configure both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses on the interface.
IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ipv6 router isis no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)# DellEMC(conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.
25 In-Service Software Upgrade This chapter deals with In-Service Software Upgrade (ISSU) and its dependencies. Topics: • • • • • • • • • ISSU Introduction Fastboot 2.0 (Zero Loss Upgrade) L2 ISSU L3 ISSU CoPP Mirroring flow control packets PFC QoS Tunnel Configuration ISSU Introduction In-service software upgrades (ISSU), also known as warmboot or fastboot 2.0, allow Dell EMC Networking to address software bugs and add new features to switches and routers without interrupting network availability.
LACP Long Timeout If there is a LACP protocol running on an interface, the user needs to have the LACP long timeout configured, if LACP short timeout is configured, ISSU will not take place. Spanning Tree When spanning tree is enabled, user needs to have BPDU guard configured in the interfaces. MAC Address Table During warmboot MAC address table will be stored and they are retrieved after warmboot is complete.
Mirroring flow control packets ISSU for mirroring flow control packets is a graceful implementation . The mirror ACL FP rules and the MTPs would be cleared out when the box comes up in warmboot during the ISSU audit phase, and the flows are re-programmed again with mirror action when the mirroring configurations are downloaded. In case of legacy L3 ACL based mirroring , the mirroring actions would be cleared out and re-programmed while the FP rules are retained.
26 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) Introduction to Dynamic LAGs and LACP A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by Dell EMC Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic. The benefits and constraints are basically the same, as described in Port Channel Interfaces in the Interfaces chapter.
• Passive — In this state, the interface is not in an active negotiating state, but LACP runs on the link. A port in Passive state also responds to negotiation requests (from ports in Active state). Ports in Passive state respond to LACP packets. Dell EMC Networking OS supports LAGs in the following cases: • • A port in Active state can set up a port channel (LAG) with another port in Active state. A port in Active state can set up a LAG with another port in Passive state.
switchport DellEMC(conf)#interface port-channel 32 DellEMC(conf-if-po-32)#no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-po-32)#switchport The LAG is in the default VLAN. To place the LAG into a non-default VLAN, use the tagged command on the LAG. DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 10 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-10)#tagged port-channel 32 Configuring the LAG Interfaces as Dynamic After creating a LAG, configure the dynamic LAG interfaces. To configure the dynamic LAG interfaces, use the following command.
DellEMC# show lacp 32 Port-channel 32 admin up, oper up, mode lacp Actor System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.a12b Partner System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking To configure shared LAG state tracking, you configure a failover group. NOTE: If a LAG interface is part of a redundant pair, you cannot use it as a member of a failover group created for shared LAG state tracking. 1. Enter port-channel failover group mode. CONFIGURATION mode port-channel failover-group 2. Create a failover group and specify the two port-channels that will be members of the group.
Members in this channel: Te 1/17/1(U) ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:01:28 Queueing strategy: fifo NOTE: The set of console messages shown above appear only if you configure shared LAG state tracking on that router (you can configure the feature on one or both sides of a link). For example, as previously shown, if you configured shared LAG state tracking on R2 only, no messages appear on R4 regarding the state of LAGs in a failover group.
Example of Viewing a LAG Port Configuration Alpha#sh int TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 is up, line protocol is up Port is part of Port-channel 10 Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Current address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Interface Index is 109101113 Port will not be disabled on partial SFM failure Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 10000 Mbit, Mode full duplex, Slave Flowcontrol rx on tx on ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last
Figure 70.
Figure 71.
Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#switch Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#show config ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#exit Bravo(conf)#int tengig 1/1/1/3 Bravo(conf)#no ip address Bravo(conf)#no switchport Bravo(conf)#shutdown Bravo(conf-if-te-1/1/1/3)#port-channel-protocol lacp Bravo(conf-if-te-1/1/1/3-lacp)#port-channel 10 mode active Bravo(conf-if-te-1/1/1/3-lacp)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-te-1/1/1/3)#end ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/3 no ip
Figure 72.
Figure 73.
Figure 74. Inspecting the LAG Status Using the show lacp command The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is a connection-oriented protocol that enables layer two links over various different physical layer connections. It is supported on both synchronous and asynchronous lines, and can operate in Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex mode. It was designed to carry IP traffic but is general enough to allow any type of network layer datagram to be sent over a PPP connection.
27 Layer 2 Manage the MAC Address Table You can perform the following management tasks in the MAC address table. • • • • Clearing the MAC Address Table Setting the Aging Time for Dynamic Entries Configuring a Static MAC Address Displaying the MAC Address Table Clearing the MAC Address Table You may clear the MAC address table of dynamic entries. To clear a MAC address table, use the following command. • Clear a MAC address table of dynamic entries.
Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table, use the following command. • Display the contents of the MAC address table. EXEC Privilege mode show mac-address-table [address | aging-time [vlan vlan-id]| count | dynamic | interface | static | vlan] • • • • • • • address: displays the specified entry. aging-time: displays the configured aging-time. count: displays the number of dynamic and static entries for all VLANs, and the total number of entries.
NOTE: An SNMP trap is available for mac learning-limit station-move. No other SNMP traps are available for MAC Learning Limit, including limit violations. mac learning-limit Dynamic The MAC address table is stored on the Layer 2 forwarding information base (FIB) region of the CAM. The Layer 2 FIB region allocates space for static MAC address entries and dynamic MAC address entries. When you enable MAC learning limit, entries created on this port are static by default.
interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 no ip address switchport mac learning-limit 1 dynamic no-station-move mac learning-limit station-move-violation log no shutdown Learning Limit Violation Actions To configure the system to take an action when the MAC learning limit is reached on an interface and a new address is received using one the following options with the mac learning-limit command, use the following commands. • Generate a system log message when the MAC learning limit is exceeded.
• mac learning-limit reset Reset interfaces in the ERR_Disabled state caused by a learning limit violation. • EXEC Privilege mode mac learning-limit reset learn-limit-violation [interface | all] Reset interfaces in the ERR_Disabled state caused by a station move violation. EXEC Privilege mode mac learning-limit reset station-move-violation [interface | all] Disabling MAC Address Learning on the System You can configure the system to not learn MAC addresses from LACP and LLDP BPDUs.
Figure 75. Redundant NICs with NIC Teaming When you use NIC teaming, consider that the server MAC address is originally learned on Port 0/1 of the switch (shown in the following) and Port 0/5 is the failover port. When the NIC fails, the system automatically sends an ARP request for the gateway or host NIC to resolve the ARP and refresh the egress interface.
Assign a backup interface to an interface using the switchport backup command. The backup interface remains in a Down state until the primary fails, at which point it transitions to Up state. If the primary interface fails, and later comes up, it becomes the backup interface for the redundant pair. Dell EMC Networking OS supports Gigabit, 10 Gigabit, and 40-Gigabit interfaces as backup interfaces.
• • • The active or backup interface can be a LAG, but it cannot be a member port of a LAG. The active and standby do not have to be of the same type (1G, 10G, and so on). You may not enable any Layer 2 protocol on any interface of a redundant pair or to ports connected to them. As shown in the previous illustration, interface 1/1/1/1 is a backup interface for 1/1/2/1, and 1/1/3/1 is in the Down state. If 1/1/1/1 fails, 1/1/2/1 transitions to the Up state, which makes the backup link active.
Port-channel 1 Port-channel 2 DellEMC# Active Standby Port-chato mannel 2 Port-channel 1 Standby Active DellEMC(conf-if-po-1)#switchport backup interface tengigabitethernet 1/2/1 Apr 9 00:16:29: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-L2BKUP_WARN: Do not run any Layer2 protocols on Po 1 and Te 1/1/1/2 DellEMC(conf-if-po-1)# Far-End Failure Detection Far-end failure detection (FEFD) is a protocol that senses remote data link errors in a network.
3. When the local interface receives the echoed packet from the remote end, the local interface transitions to the Bi-directional state. 4. If the FEFD enabled system is configured to use FEFD in Normal mode and neighboring echoes are not received after three intervals, (you can set each interval can be set between 3 and 300 seconds) the state changes to unknown. 5.
To display information about the state of each interface, use the show fefd command in EXEC privilege mode. DellEMC#show fefd FEFD is globally 'ON', interval is 3 seconds, mode is 'Normal'.
• Display output whenever events occur that initiate or disrupt an FEFD enabled connection. • EXEC Privilege mode debug fefd events Provide output for each packet transmission over the FEFD enabled connection.
28 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) 802.1AB (LLDP) Overview LLDP — defined by IEEE 802.1AB — is a protocol that enables a local area network (LAN) device to advertise its configuration and receive configuration information from adjacent LLDP-enabled LAN infrastructure devices. The collected information is stored in a management information base (MIB) on each device, and is accessible via simple network management protocol (SNMP).
Type TLV Description — Optional Includes sub-types of TLVs that advertise specific configuration information. These sub-types are Management TLVs, IEEE 802.1, IEEE 802.3, and TIA-1057 Organizationally Specific TLVs. Figure 80. LLDPDU Frame Optional TLVs The Dell EMC Networking OS supports these optional TLVs: management TLVs, IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 organizationally specific TLVs, and TIA-1057 organizationally specific TLVs. Management TLVs A management TLV is an optional TLVs sub-type.
Type TLV Description 7 System capabilities Identifies the chassis as one or more of the following: repeater, bridge, WLAN Access Point, Router, Telephone, DOCSIS cable device, end station only, or other. 8 Management address Indicates the network address of the management interface. Dell EMC Networking OS does not currently support this TLV. 127 Port-VLAN ID On Dell EMC Networking systems, indicates the untagged VLAN to which a port belongs.
TIA Organizationally Specific TLVs The Dell EMC Networking system is an LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device (Device Type 4). Network connectivity devices are responsible for: • • transmitting an LLDP-MED capability TLV to endpoint devices storing the information that endpoint devices advertise The following table describes the five types of TIA-1057 Organizationally Specific TLVs. Table 54.
LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV The LLDP-MED capabilities TLV communicates the types of TLVs that the endpoint device and the network connectivity device support. LLDP-MED network connectivity devices must transmit the Network Policies TLV. • • The value of the LLDP-MED capabilities field in the TLV is a 2–octet bitmap, each bit represents an LLDP-MED capability (as shown in the following table). The possible values of the LLDP-MED device type are shown in the following.
different network policy than the media packets for which a connection is made. In this case, configure the signaling application. Table 57. Network Policy Applications Type Application Description 0 Reserved — 1 Voice Specify this application type for dedicated IP telephony handsets and other appliances supporting interactive voice services. 2 Voice Signaling Specify this application type only if voice control packets use a separate network policy than voice data.
Figure 84. Extended Power via MDI TLV Configure LLDP Configuring LLDP is a two-step process. 1. Enable LLDP globally. 2. Advertise TLVs out of an interface. Related Configuration Tasks • • • • • • Viewing the LLDP Configuration Viewing Information Advertised by Adjacent LLDP Agents Configuring LLDPDU Intervals Configuring Transmit and Receive Mode Configuring a Time to Live Debugging LLDP Important Points to Remember • • • • • LLDP is enabled by default.
multiplier no show LLDP multiplier configuration Negate a command or set its defaults Show LLDP configuration DellEMC(conf-lldp)#exit DellEMC(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/3/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1)#protocol lldp DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1-lldp)#? advertise Advertise TLVs disable Disable LLDP protocol on this interface end Exit from configuration mode exit Exit from LLDP configuration mode hello LLDP hello configuration mode LLDP mode configuration (default = rx and tx) multiplier LLDP multi
Disabling and Undoing LLDP on Management Ports To disable or undo LLDP on management ports, use the following command. 1. Enter Protocol LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION mode. protocol lldp 2. Enter LLDP management-interface mode. LLDP-MANAGEMENT-INTERFACE mode. management-interface 3. Enter the disable command. LLDP-MANAGEMENT-INTERFACE mode. To undo an LLDP management port configuration, precede the relevant command with the keyword no.
Figure 85. Configuring LLDP Storing and Viewing Unrecognized LLDP TLVs Dell EMC Networking OS provides support to store unrecognized (reserved and organizational specific) LLDP TLVs. Also, support is extended to retrieve the stored unrecognized TLVs using SNMP. When the incoming TLV from LLDP neighbors is not recognized, the TLV is categorized as unrecognized TLV. The unrecognized TLVs is categorized into two types: 1. Reserved unrecognized LLDP TLV 2.
Viewing Unrecognized LLDP TLVs You can view or retrieve the stored unrecognized (reserved and organizational specific) TLVs using the show lldp neighbor details command. View all the LLDP TLV information including unrecognized TLVs, using the snmpwalk and snmpget commands. Viewing the LLDP Configuration To view the LLDP configuration, use the following command. • Display the LLDP configuration. CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode show config The following example shows viewing an LLDP global configuration.
Te 1/1/2/1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/4/1 Ma 1/1 swlab2-maa-tor-...TenGigabitEthernet 1/3 00:01:e8:05:40:46 d8:9e:f3:b2:61:20 The length of the LLDP neighbors (Remote host) name is truncated if it is above 15 characters.
----------------------------------------------------------------------Remote Chassis ID Subtype: Mac address (4) Remote Chassis ID: 00:00:00:00:00:01 Remote Port Subtype: Interface name (5) Remote Port ID: TenGigabitEthernEt 1/40 Local Port ID: hundredGigE 1/1/1 Locally assigned remote Neighbor Index: 1 Remote TTL: 120 Information valid for next 44 seconds Time since last information change of this neighbor: 00:01:16 UnknownTLVList: ( 9, 4) ( 10, 4) ( 11, 4) ( 12, 4) ( 13, 4) ( 14, 4) ( 15, 4) ( 19, 4) ( 20
((00-01-66),127, 4) ((00-01-66),126, 4) ((00-01-66),125, 4) ((00-01-66),124, ((00-01-66),122, 4) ((00-01-66),121, 4) ((00-01-66),120, 4) ((00-01-66),119, --------------------------------------------------------------------------Remote Chassis ID Subtype: Mac address (4) Remote Chassis ID: 4c:76:25:f4:ab:03 Remote Port Subtype: Interface name (5) Remote Port ID: fortyGigE 1/2/8/1 Local Port ID: hundredGigE 1/1/2 Locally assigned remote Neighbor Index: 3 Remote TTL: 300 Information valid for next 199 seconds
• • Example: snmp-notification-interval [5–3600] SNMP — Through the snmpset command. • • Example: snmpset —c public —v2c 10.16.127.10 LLDP-MIB::lldpNotificationInterval.0 I 20 REST API — Through configuring by REST API method. Configuring Transmit and Receive Mode After you enable LLDP, the system transmits and receives LLDPDUs by default. To configure the system to transmit or receive only and return to the default, use the following commands. • Transmit only.
no multiplier R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)#multiplier ? <2-10> Multiplier (default=4) R1(conf-lldp)#multiplier 5 R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description multiplier 5 no
Figure 86. The debug lldp detail Command — LLDPDU Packet Dissection Example of debug lldp Command Output with Unrecognized Reserved and Organizational Specific LLDP TLVs The following is an example of LLDPDU with both (Reserved and Organizational specific) unrecognized TLVs.
Table 58. LLDP Configuration MIB Objects MIB Object Category LLDP Variable LLDP MIB Object Description LLDP Configuration adminStatus lldpPortConfigAdminStatus Whether you enable the local LLDP agent for transmit, receive, or both. msgTxHold lldpMessageTxHoldMultiplier Multiplier value. msgTxInterval lldpMessageTxInterval Transmit Interval value. rxInfoTTL lldpRxInfoTTL Time to live for received TLVs. txInfoTTL lldpTxInfoTTL Time to live for transmitted TLVs.
TLV Type 7 8 TLV Name System Capabilities Management Address TLV Variable system capabilities enabled capabilities management address length management address subtype management address interface numbering subtype interface number OID System LLDP MIB Object Remote lldpRemSysDesc Local lldpLocSysCapSupported Remote lldpRemSysCapSupported Local lldpLocSysCapEnabled Remote lldpRemSysCapEnabled Local lldpLocManAddrLen Remote lldpRemManAddrLen Local lldpLocManAddrSubtype Remote
Table 61.
29 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network load balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems (OSs). NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
• • • The NLB Unicast mode uses switch flooding to transmit all packets to all the servers that are part of the VLAN. When a large volume of traffic is processed, the clustering performance might be impacted in a small way. This limitation is applicable to switches that perform unicast flooding in the software. The ip vlan-flooding command applies globally across the system and for all VLANs.
This setting causes the multicast MAC address to be mapped to the Cluster IP address for the NLB mode of operation of the switch. NOTE: While configuring static ARP for the Cluster IP, provide any one of the interfaces that is used in the static multicast MAC configuration, where the Cluster host is connected. As the switch does not accept only one ARPinterface pair, if you configure static ARP with each egress interface, the switch overwrites the previous egressinterface configuration. 2.
30 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Protocol Overview MSDP is a Layer 3 protocol that connects IPv4 protocol-independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM) domains. A domain in the context of MSDP is a contiguous set of routers operating PIM within a common boundary defined by an exterior gateway protocol, such as border gateway protocol (BGP).
Figure 88.
Implementation Information The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of MSDP is in accordance with RFC 3618 and Anycast RP is in accordance with RFC 3446. Configure Multicast Source Discovery Protocol Configuring MSDP is a four-step process. 1. Enable an exterior gateway protocol (EGP) with at least two routing domains. Refer to the following figures. The MSDP Sample Configurations show the OSPF-BGP configuration used in this chapter for MSDP.
Figure 89.
Figure 90.
Figure 91.
Figure 92. Configuring MSDP Enable MSDP Enable MSDP by peering RPs in different administrative domains. 1. Enable MSDP. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-msdp 2. Peer PIM systems in different administrative domains. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer connect-source R3(conf)#ip multicast-msdp R3(conf)#ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
Multicast sources in remote domains are stored on the RP in the source-active cache (SA cache). The system does not create entries in the multicast routing table until there is a local receiver for the corresponding multicast group. R3#show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.
Enabling the Rejected Source-Active Cache To cache rejected sources, use the following command. Active sources can be rejected because the RPF check failed, the SA limit is reached, the peer RP is unreachable, or the SA message has a format error. • Cache rejected sources. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp cache-rejected-sa Accept Source-Active Messages that Fail the RFP Check A default peer is a peer from which active sources are accepted even though they fail the RFP check.
Figure 94.
Figure 95. MSDP Default Peer, Scenario 4 Specifying Source-Active Messages To specify messages, use the following command. • Specify the forwarding-peer and originating-RP from which all active sources are accepted without regard for the RPF check. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp default-peer ip-address list If you do not specify an access list, the peer accepts all sources that peer advertises. All sources from RPs that the ACL denies are subject to the normal RPF check. DellEMC(conf)#ip msdp peer 10.0.50.
3 rejected SAs received, cache-size 32766 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:33:18 229.0.50.64 24.0.50.64 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.65 24.0.50.65 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.66 24.0.50.66 200.0.1.50 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 Reason Rpf-Fail Rpf-Fail Rpf-Fail Limiting the Source-Active Messages from a Peer To limit the source-active messages from a peer, use the following commands. 1. OPTIONAL: Store sources that are received after the limit is reached in the rejected SA cache.
2. Prevent the system from caching remote sources learned from a specific peer based on source and group. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp sa-filter list out peer list ext-acl As shown in the following example, R1 is advertising source 10.11.4.2. It is already in the SA cache of R3 when an ingress SA filter is applied to R3. The entry remains in the SA cache until it expires and is not stored in the rejected SA cache. [Router 3] R3(conf)#do show run msdp ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
To display the configured SA filters for a peer, use the show ip msdp peer command from EXEC Privilege mode. Logging Changes in Peership States To log changes in peership states, use the following command. • Log peership state changes. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp log-adjacency-changes Terminating a Peership MSDP uses TCP as its transport protocol. In a peering relationship, the peer with the lower IP address initiates the TCP session, while the peer with the higher IP address listens on port 639.
R3(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 0.0.0.0(0) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Inactive Up/Down Time: 00:00:04 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 0/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Input (S,G) filter: myremotefilter Output (S,G) filter: none Debugging MSDP To debug MSDP, use the following command. • Display the information exchanged between peers.
Figure 96. MSDP with Anycast RP Configuring Anycast RP To configure anycast RP, use the following commands. 1. In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create a Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with the same IP address. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback 2. Make this address the RP for the group. CONFIGURATION mode ip pim rp-address 3.
network Reducing Source-Active Message Flooding RPs flood source-active messages to all of their peers away from the RP. When multiple RPs exist within a domain, the RPs forward received active source information back to the originating RP, which violates the RFP rule. You can prevent this unnecessary flooding by creating a mesh-group. A mesh in this context is a topology in which each RP in a set of RPs has a peership with all other RPs in the set.
The following example shows an R2 configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP. ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3/2 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.21/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/4/2 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.23/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.1/32 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 1 ip address 192.168.0.
network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.3/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 200 ! router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.22 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.22 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.22 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.22 no shutdown ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.11 connect-source Loopback 0 ip msdp peer 192.168.0.22 connect-source Loopback 0 ip msdp sa-filter out 192.168.0.22 ! ip route 192.168.0.1/32 10.11.0.
! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/2 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.21/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/3 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.23/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.0.2/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.4.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.2/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 100 ! router bgp 100 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.3 remote-as 200 neighbor 192.168.0.
! ip route 192.168.0.2/32 10.11.0.23 MSDP Sample Configuration: R4 Running-Config ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/2 ip address 10.10.42.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/3 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.6.43/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.0.4/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.5.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.6.
31 Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol Dell Networking OS Supports Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is a Layer 3 protocol that IPv6 routers use to learn of the multicast receivers that are directly connected to them and the groups in which the receivers are interested. Multicast routing protocols (like PIM) use the information learned from MLD to route multicast traffic to all interested receivers.
Destination Address field). To avoid duplicate reporting, any host that hears a report from another host for the same group in which it itself is interested cancels its report for that group. A host does not have to wait for a General Query to join a group. If a host wants to become a member of a group for which the router is not currently forwarding traffic, it should send an unsolicited report.
| | * * | | +. -+ . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ Version 2 multicast listener reports are sent by IP nodes to report (to neighboring routers) the current multicast listening state, or changes in the multicast listening state, of their interfaces.
| | * Source Address [2] * | | * * | | +-+ . . . . . . . . . +-+ | | * * | | * Source Address [N] * | | * * | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | . . . Auxiliary Data . . .
Configuring MLD Version To configure MLD version on the system, follow this procedure: Select the MLD version INTERFACE Mode ipv6 mld version {1 | 2} If you do not configure the MLD version, the system defaults to version 2. The ipv6 mld version command is applicable for MLD snooping-enabled interfaces. Clearing MLD groups Clear a specific group or all groups on an interface from the multicast routing table.
EXEC Privilege show ipv6 mld groups Dell#show ipv6 mld groups Total Number of Groups: 1 MLD Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Ff08::12 Vlan 10 MLDv2 Uptime 00:00:12 Expires 00:02:05 Last Reporter 1::2 Displaying MLD Interfaces Display MLD interfaces.
Configure the switch as a querier Hosts that do not support unsolicited reporting wait for a general query before sending a membership report. When the multicast source and receivers are in the same VLAN, multicast traffic is not routed, and so there is no querier. You must configure the switch to be the querier for a VLAN so that hosts send membership reports, and the switch can generate a forwarding table by snooping.
32 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) — specified in IEEE 802.1Q-2003 — is a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)-based spanning tree variation that improves per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). MSTP allows multiple spanning tree instances and allows you to map many VLANs to one spanning tree instance to reduce the total number of required instances. Protocol Overview MSTP — specified in IEEE 802.
• • • • • • Modifying the Interface Parameters Setting STP path cost as constant Configuring an EdgePort Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change MSTP Sample Configurations Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations Spanning Tree Variations The Dell EMC Networking OS supports four variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 62. Spanning Tree Variations Dell EMC Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .
Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Globally MSTP is not enabled by default. To enable MSTP globally, use the following commands. When you enable MSTP, all physical, VLAN, and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the MSTI 0. • • Within an MSTI, only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled. Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports. 1. Enter PROTOCOL MSTP mode. CONFIGURATION mode protocol spanning-tree mstp 2. Enable MSTP.
To view which instance a VLAN is mapped to, use the show spanning-tree mst vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode. DellEMC(conf-mstp)#name my-mstp-region DellEMC(conf-mstp)#exit DellEMC(conf)#do show spanning-tree mst config MST region name: my-mstp-region Revision: 0 MSTI VID 1 100 2 200-300 To view the forwarding/discarding state of the ports participating in an MSTI, use the show spanning-tree msti command from EXEC Privilege mode.
Changing the Region Name or Revision To change the region name or revision, use the following commands. • Change the region name. • PROTOCOL MSTP mode name name Change the region revision number. PROTOCOL MSTP mode revision number To view the current region name and revision, use the show spanning-tree mst configuration command from EXEC Privilege mode.
PROTOCOL MSTP mode max-hops number The range is from 1 to 40. The default is 20. To view the current values for MSTP parameters, use the show running-config spanning-tree mstp command from EXEC privilege mode.
INTERFACE mode spanning-tree msti number priority priority The range is from 0 to 240, in increments of 16. The default is 128. To view the current values for these interface parameters, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode. Setting STP path cost as constant You can set the path cost to be constant for port-channel regardless of the operation status of the port-channel member ports. To set the STP path cost, use the port-channel path-cost custom command from the PROTOCOL SPANNING-TREE mode.
spanning-tree mstp edge-port spanning-tree MSTI 1 priority 144 no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)# Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change Dell EMC Networking OS has an optimized MAC address flush mechanism for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ that flushes addresses only when necessary, which allows for faster convergence during topology changes. However, you may activate the flushing mechanism defined by 802.
switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/2 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1,1/1/1/2 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1,1/1/1/2 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1,1/1/1/2 no shutdown Router 2 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1.
no shutdown spanning-tree port mode enable switchport protected 0 exit (Step 3) interface vlan 100 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 200 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 300 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations To debut and verify MSTP configuration, use the following commands. • • Display BPDUs. EXEC Privilege mode debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu Display MSTP-triggered topology change messages.
The following example shows viewing the debug log of a successful MSTP configuration. DellEMC#debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu MSTP debug bpdu is ON DellEMC# 4w0d4h : MSTP: Sending BPDU on Te 2/21/1 : ProtId: 0, Ver: 3, Bpdu Type: MSTP, Flags 0x6e CIST Root Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e, Ext Path Cost: 0 Regional Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.
33 Multicast Features NOTE: Multicast routing is supported on secondary IP addresses; it is not supported on IPv6. NOTE: Multicast routing is supported across default and non-default virtual routing and forwarding (VRFs).
Protocol Ethernet Address PIM-SM 01:00:5e:00:00:0d • • • • The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of MTRACE is in accordance with IETF draft draft-fenner-traceroute-ipm. Multicast is not supported on secondary IP addresses. If you enable multicast routing, egress Layer 3 ACL is not applied to multicast data traffic. Multicast traffic can be forwarded to a maximum of 15 VLANs with the same outgoing interface.
NOTE: The IN-L3-McastFib CAM partition stores multicast routes and is a separate hardware limit that exists per portpipe. Any software-configured limit may supersede this hardware space limitation. The opposite is also true, the CAM partition might not be exhausted at the time the system-wide route limit is reached using the ip multicast-limit command.
Figure 99. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 64. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description Location Description 1/21/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Location Description 2/11/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown 3/11/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
You can configure PIM to switch over to the SPT when the router receives multicast packets at or beyond a specified rate. Table 65. Configuring PIM to Switch Over to the SPT Configuring PIM to Switch Over to the SPT Command Mode IPv4 Configure PIM to switch over to the SPT when the multicast packet rate is at or beyond a specified rate. The keyword infinity directs PIM to never switch to the SPT.
Figure 100. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 66. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description Location Description 1/21/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/2 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Location Description 2/11/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/4 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/2 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown 3/11/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/3 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Understanding Multicast Traceroute (mtrace) Multicast Traceroute (mtrace) is a multicast diagnostic facility used for tracing multicast paths. Mtrace enables you to trace the path that a multicast packet takes from its source to the destination. When you initiate mtrace from a source to a destination, an mtrace Query packet with IGMP type 0x1F is sent to the last-hop multicast router for the given destination. The mtrace query packet is forwarded hop-by-hop untill it reaches the last-hop router.
the RPF neighbor. When a Dell EMC Networking system is the last hop to the destination, Dell EMC Networking OS sends a response to the query. To print the network path, use the following command. • Print the network path that a multicast packet takes from a multicast source to receiver, for a particular group.
Command Output Description • • • • -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source o (1.1.1.1) Outgoing interface address at that node for the source and group o (PIM) Multicast protocol used at the node to retrieve the information o (Reached RP/Core) Forwarding code in mtrace to denote that RP node is reached o (103.103.103.0/24) Source network and mask. In case (*G) tree is used, this field will have the value as (shared tree).
Scenario destination by using the multicast tables for that group. Output destination 1.1.1.1 via group 226.0.0.3 From source (?) to destination (?) ---------------------------------------------------------------|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/ Mask| ---------------------------------------------------------------0 1.1.1.1 --> Destination -1 1.1.1.1 PIM Reached RP/Core 103.103.103.0/24 -2 101.101.101.102 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -4 103.103.103.
Scenario Output Querying reverse path for source 103.103.103.3 to destination 1.1.1.1 via RPF From source (?) to destination (?) ---------------------------------------------------------------|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/ Mask| ---------------------------------------------------------------0 1.1.1.1 --> Destination -1 1.1.1.1 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -2 101.101.101.102 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -4 103.103.103.
Scenario is not PIM enabled, the output of the command displays a NO ROUTE error code in the Forwarding Code column. In the command output, the entry for that node in the Source Network/Mask column displays the value as default. If a multicast tree is not formed due to a configuration issue (for example, PIM is not enabled on one of the interfaces on the path), you can invoke a weak mtrace to identify the location in the network where the error has originated. Output Querying reverse path for source 6.6.
Scenario output of the command displays a ‘*’ indicating that no response is received for an mtrace request. The following message appears when the system performs a hopby-hop search: “switching to hop-by-hop:” Output 1.1.1.1 via RPF From source (?) to destination (?) * * * * switching to hop-by-hop: ---------------------------------------------------------------|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/ Mask| ---------------------------------------------------------------0 1.1.1.
Scenario Output . . . -146 17.17.17.17 PIM No space in packet 99.99.0.0/16 ----------------------------------------------------------------- In a valid scenario, mtrace request packets are expected to be received on the OIF of the node. However, due to incorrect formation of the multicast tree, the packet may be received on a wrong interface. In such a scenario, a corresponding error message is displayed. R1>mtrace 6.6.6.6 4.4.4.5 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Querying reverse path for source 6.6.6.
34 Object Tracking IPv4 or IPv6 object tracking is available on Dell EMC Networking OS. Object tracking allows the Dell EMC Networking OS client processes, such as virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP), to monitor tracked objects (for example, interface or link status) and take appropriate action when the state of an object changes. NOTE: In Dell EMC Networking OS release version 8.4.1.0, object tracking is supported only on VRRP.
Figure 101. Object Tracking Example When you configure a tracked object, such as an IPv4/IPv6 a route or interface, you specify an object number to identify the object. Optionally, you can also specify: • • UP and DOWN thresholds used to report changes in a route metric. A time delay before changes in a tracked object’s state are reported to a client. Track Layer 2 Interfaces You can create an object to track the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.
A tracked route matches a route in the routing table only if the exact address and prefix length match an entry in the routing table. For example, when configured as a tracked route, 10.0.0.0/24 does not match the routing table entry 10.0.0.0/8. If no route-table entry has the exact address and prefix length, the tracked route is considered to be DOWN.
VRRP Object Tracking As a client, VRRP can track up to 20 objects (including route entries, and Layer 2 and Layer 3 interfaces) in addition to the 12 tracked interfaces supported for each VRRP group. You can assign a unique priority-cost value from 1 to 254 to each tracked VRRP object or group interface. The priority cost is subtracted from the VRRP group priority if a tracked VRRP object is in a DOWN state.
Track 100 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 line-protocol Description: San Jose data center Tracking a Layer 3 Interface You can create an object that tracks the routing status of an IPv4 or IPv6 Layer 3 interface. You can track the routing status of any of the following Layer 3 interfaces: • • • • • • • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the stack/slot/port/subport information.
Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 ip routing Description: NYC metro The following is an example of configuring object tracking for an IPv6 interface: DellEMC(conf)#track 103 interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/2/1 ipv6 routing DellEMC(conf-track-103)#description Austin access point DellEMC(conf-track-103)#end DellEMC#show track 103 Track 103 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 ipv6 routing Description: Austin access point Track an IPv4/IPv6 Route You can create an object that tracks the reachability or me
Tracking Route Reachability Use the following commands to configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. To remove object tracking, use the no track object-id command. 1. Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id {ip route ip-address/prefix-len | ipv6 route ipv6-address/prefix-len} reachability [vrf vrf-name] Valid object IDs are from 1 to 500.
Configuring track reachability refresh interval If there is no entry in ARP table or if the next-hop address in the ARP cache ages out for a route tracked for its reachability, an attempt is made to check if the next-hop address is reachable after a certain refresh interval to see if the next-hop address appear in the ARP cache before considering it as DOWN. You can change the refresh interval for which the next-hop address is checked. The default refresh interval is 60 seconds.
threshold metric {[up number] [down number]} The default UP threshold is 254. The routing state is UP if the scaled route metric is less than or equal to the UP threshold. The defult DOWN threshold is 255. The routing state is DOWN if the scaled route metric is greater than or equal to the DOWN threshold. 6. (Optional) Display the tracking configuration.
Reachability is Up (STATIC) 5 changes, last change 00:02:16 First-hop interface is TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 Tracked by: VRRP TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/4/1 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 4 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/5/1 ip routing IP routing is Up 3 changes, last change 00:03:30 Tracked by: Example of the show track brief Command Router# show track brief ResId State 1 Resource LastChange IP route reachability Parameter 10.16.0.
35 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open shortest path first (OSPFv2 for IPv4) and OSPF version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. This chapter provides a general description of OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) and OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) as supported in the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) are the same between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
Figure 102. Autonomous System Areas Area Types The backbone of the network is Area 0. It is also called Area 0.0.0.0 and is the core of any AS. All other areas must connect to Area 0. An OSPF backbone is responsible for distributing routing information between areas. It consists of all area border routers, networks not wholly contained in any area, and their attached routers. NOTE: If you configure two non-backbone areas, then you must enable the B bit in OSPF.
Networks and Neighbors As a link-state protocol, OSPF sends routing information to other OSPF routers concerning the state of the links between them. The state (up or down) of those links is important. Routers that share a link become neighbors on that segment. OSPF uses the Hello protocol as a neighbor discovery and keep alive mechanism. After two routers are neighbors, they may proceed to exchange and synchronize their databases, which creates an adjacency.
Backbone Router (BR) A backbone router (BR) is part of the OSPF Backbone, Area 0. This includes all ABRs. It can also include any routers that connect only to the backbone and another ABR, but are only part of Area 0, such as Router I in the previous example. Area Border Router (ABR) Within an AS, an area border router (ABR) connects one or more areas to the backbone. The ABR keeps a copy of the link-state database for every area it connects to, so it may keep multiple copies of the link state database.
• • • • • (for example, the ASBR where the Type 5 advertisement originated. The link-state ID for Type 4 LSAs is the router ID of the described ASBR). Type 5: LSA — These LSAs contain information imported into OSPF from other routing processes. They are flooded to all areas, except stub areas. The link-state ID of the Type 5 LSA is the external network number.
Figure 104. Priority and Cost Examples OSPF with Dell EMC Networking OS The Dell EMC Networking OS supports up to 128,000 OSPF routes for OSPFv2. Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.4(0.0) and later support only one OSPFv2 process per VRF. Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.7(0.0) and later support OSPFv3 in VRF. Also, on OSPFv3, Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one OSPFv3 process per VRF. OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 can co-exist but you must configure them individually.
RPM have been downloaded into the forwarding information base (FIB) on the line cards (the data plane) and are still resident. For packets that have existing FIB/CAM entries, forwarding between ingress and egress ports/VLANs, and so on, can continue uninterrupted while the control plane OSPF process comes back to full functionality and rebuilds its routing tables.
Processing SNMP and Sending SNMP Traps Only the process in default vrf can process the SNMP requests and send SNMP traps. NOTE: SNMP gets request corresponding to the OspfNbrOption field in the OspfNbrTable returns a value of 66. RFC-2328 Compliant OSPF Flooding In OSPF, flooding is the most resource-consuming task. The flooding algorithm described in RFC 2328 requires that OSPF flood LSAs on all interfaces, as governed by LSA’s flooding scope (refer to Section 13 of the RFC.
OSPF ACK Packing The OSPF ACK packing feature bundles multiple LS acknowledgements in a single packet, significantly reducing the number of ACK packets transmitted when the number of LSAs increases. This feature also enhances network utilization and reduces the number of small ACK packets sent to a neighboring router. OSPF ACK packing is enabled by default and non-configurable.
Configuration Task List for OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) You can perform the following tasks to configure Open Shortest Path First version 2 (OSPF for IPv4) on the switch. Two of the tasks are mandatory; others are optional.
no shutdown 3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode to enable the OSPFv2 process globally. CONFIGURATION mode router ospf process-id [vrf {vrf name}] • vrf name: enter the keyword VRF and the instance name to tie the OSPF instance to the VRF. All network commands under this OSPF instance are later tied to the VRF instance. The range is from 0 to 65535. The OSPF process ID is the identifying number assigned to the OSPF process. The router ID is the IP address associated with the OSPF process.
network ip-address mask area area-id The IP Address Format is A.B.C.D/M. The area ID range is from 0 to 65535 or A.B.C.D/M. Enable OSPFv2 on Interfaces Enable and configure OSPFv2 on each interface (configure for Layer 3 protocol), and not shutdown. You can also assign OSPFv2 to a Loopback interface as a virtual interface. OSPF functions and features, such as MD5 Authentication, Grace Period, Authentication Wait Time, are assigned on a per interface basis.
Example of Viewing OSPF Status on a Loopback Interface DellEMC#show ip ospf 1 int TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3/1 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 10.168.0.1/24, Area 0.0.0.1 Process ID 1, Router ID 10.168.253.2, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DROTHER, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.168.253.5, Interface address 10.168.0.4 Backup Designated Router (ID) 192.168.253.3, Interface address 10.168.0.
Enabling Passive Interfaces A passive interface is one that does not send or receive routing information. Enabling passive interface suppresses routing updates on an interface. Although the passive interface does not send or receive routing updates, the network on that interface is still included in OSPF updates sent via other interfaces. To suppress the interface’s participation on an OSPF interface, use the following command. This command stops the router from sending updates on that interface.
• Enable OSPF fast-convergence and specify the convergence level. CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF- id mode fast-convergence {number} The parameter range is from 1 to 4. The higher the number, the faster the convergence. When disabled, the parameter is set at 0. NOTE: A higher convergence level can result in occasional loss of OSPF adjacency. Generally, convergence level 1 meets most convergence requirements. Only select higher convergence levels following consultation with Dell Technical Support.
• • seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535 (the default is 10 seconds). The hello interval must be the same on all routers in the OSPF network. Use the MD5 algorithm to produce a message digest or key, which is sent instead of the key. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf message-digest-key keyid md5 key • • keyid: the range is from 1 to 255. Key: a character string. NOTE: Be sure to write down or otherwise record the key. You cannot learn the key after it is configured.
ip ospf authentication-key key Configure a key that is a text string no longer than eight characters. • All neighboring routers must share password to exchange OSPF information. Set the authentication change wait time in seconds between 0 and 300 for the interface. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf auth-change-wait-time seconds This setting is the amount of time OSPF has available to change its interface authentication type.
NOTE: The Helper mode is enabled by default on the device. To enable the restart mode also on the device, you must configure the grace period using the graceful-restart grace-period command. After you enable restart mode the router advertises the neighbor as fully adjacent during a restart. For more information about OSPF graceful restart, refer to the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Configure the following required and optional parameters: • • • • • bgp, connected, isis, rip, static: enter one of the keywords to redistribute those routes. metric metric-value: the range is from 0 to 4294967295. metric-type metric-type: 1 for OSPF external route type 1. 2 for OSPF external route type 2. route-map map-name: enter a name of a configured route map. tag tag-value: the range is from 0 to 4294967295.
debug ip ospf process-id [event | packet | spf | database-timers rate-limit] To view debug messages for a specific OSPF process ID, use the debug ip ospf process-id command. If you do not enter a process ID, the command applies to the first OSPF process. To view debug messages for a specific operation, enter one of the optional keywords: • • • • event: view OSPF event messages. packet: view OSPF packet information. spf: view SPF information. database-timers rate-limit: view the LSAs currently in the queue.
no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 ip address 10.2.12.2/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 10 ip address 192.168.100.100/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Te 3/1 and 3/2 router ospf 33333 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.13.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.23.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 30 ip address 192.168.100.100/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 ip address 10.1.13.3/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 ip address 10.2.13.
2. No-redistribute – To restrict Type-7 LSAs — When NSSA ASBR is also an ABR, redistributed external routes need not be translated from Type-7 to Type-5 LSAs. ABR will directly inject external routes through Type-5 LSAs into the OSPF domain. It does not send Type-7 LSAs into the NSSA area. 3. No-summary – To act as totally stubby area — NSSA area can be converted intoa totally stubby area to reduce the number of Type-3 LSAs.
Assigning IPv6 Addresses on an Interface To assign IPv6 addresses to an interface, use the following commands. 1. Assign an IPv6 address to the interface. CONF-INT-type slot/port mode ipv6 address ipv6 address IPv6 addresses are normally written as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits; separate each group by a colon (:). The format is A:B:C::F/128. 2. Bring up the interface.
Assigning OSPFv3 Process ID and Router ID to a VRF To assign, disable, or reset OSPFv3 on a non-default VRF, use the following commands. • Enable the OSPFv3 process on a non-default VRF and enter OSPFv3 mode. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 router ospf {process ID}} • The process ID range is from 0 to 65535. Assign the router ID for this OSPFv3 process. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode router-id {number} • number: the IPv4 address. The format is A.B.C.D.
CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode passive-interface {interface-type} Interface: identifies the specific interface that is passive. • • • • • • • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the stack/slot/port/subport information. For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information. For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the stack/slot/port[/subport] information.
ipv6 ospf interface-cost • • interface-cost:The range is from 1 to 65535. Default cost is based on the bandwidth. Specify how the OSPF interface cost is calculated based on the reference bandwidth method. The cost of an interface is calculated as Reference Bandwidth/Interface speed. ROUTER OSPFv3 auto-cost [reference-bandwidth ref-bw] To return to the default bandwidth or to assign cost based on the interface type, use the no auto-cost [referencebandwidth ref-bw] command.
Displaying Graceful Restart To display information on the use and configuration of OSPFv3 graceful restart, enter any of the following commands. • Display the graceful-restart configuration for OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 (shown in the following example). • EXEC Privilege mode show run ospf Display the Type-11 Grace LSAs sent and received on an OSPFv3 router (shown in the following example).
LS Age Link State ID Advertising Router LS Seq Number Checksum Length Associated Interface Restart Interval Restart Reason : : : : : : : : : 10 6.16.192.66 100.1.1.1 0x80000001 0x1DF1 36 Te 5/3/1 180 Switch to Redundant Processor OSPFv3 Authentication Using IPsec OSPFv3 uses IPsec to provide authentication for OSPFv3 packets. IPsec authentication ensures security in the transmission of OSPFv3 packets between IPsec-enabled routers.
• • Manual key configuration is supported in an authentication or encryption policy (dynamic key configuration using the internet key exchange [IKE] protocol is not supported). In an OSPFv3 authentication policy: • • AH is used to authenticate OSPFv3 headers and certain fields in IPv6 headers and extension headers. • MD5 and SHA1 authentication types are supported; encrypted and unencrypted keys are supported. In an OSPFv3 encryption policy: • • • • • Both encryption and authentication are used.
Configuring IPsec Encryption on an Interface To configure, remove, or display IPsec encryption on an interface, use the following commands. Prerequisite: Before you enable IPsec encryption on an OSPFv3 interface, first enable IPv6 unicast routing globally, configure an IPv6 address and enable OSPFv3 on the interface, and assign it to an area (refer to Configuration Task List for OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6)).
• • • • MD5 | SHA1: specifies the authentication type: message digest 5 (MD5) or Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (SHA-1). key-encryption-type: (optional) specifies if the key is encrypted. The valid values are 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). • key: specifies the text string used in authentication. All neighboring OSPFv3 routers must share key to exchange information. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted).
• • name: displays configuration details about a specified policy. Display security associations set up for OSPFv3 links in IPsec authentication and encryption policies on the router.
in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE outbound ah sas spi : 500 (0x1f4) transform : ah-md5-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE inbound esp sas outbound esp sas Interface: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe40:4d11 IPSecv6 policy name: OSPFv3-1-600 inbound ah sas outbound ah sas inbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection su
• show ipv6 route [vrf vrf-name] summary View the summary information for the OSPFv3 database. • EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 ospf [vrf vrf-name] database View the configuration of OSPFv3 neighbors. • EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 ospf [vrf vrf-name] neighbor View debug messages for all OSPFv3 interfaces.
SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.6.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.7.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.8.0 = Counter32: 10088 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.9.0 = Counter32: 10076 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.10.0 = Gauge32: 7 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.11.0 = INTEGER: -1 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.12.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.13.0 = INTEGER: 2 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.14.0 = Gauge32: 100000 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.15.0 = INTEGER: 1 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.191.1.1.16.
36 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Overview When a router receives a packet, the router decides where to forward the packet based on the destination address in the packet, which is used to look up an entry in a routing table. However, in some cases, there may be a need to forward the packet based on other criteria: size, source, protocol type, destination, and so on.
• • Dell EMC Networking OS supports multiple next-hop entries in the redirect lists. Redirect-lists are applied at Ingress. PBR with Redirect-to-Tunnel Option: You can provide a tunnel ID for a redirect rule. In this case, the resolved next hop is the tunnel interface IP. The qualifiers of the rule pertain to the inner IP details. You must provide a tunnel ID for the next hop to be a tunnel interface.
To ensure the permit permit statement or PBR exception is effective, use a lower sequence number, as shown: ip redirect-list rcl0 seq 10 permit ip host 3.3.3.3 any seq 15 redirect 2.2.2.2 ip any any Create a Redirect List To create a redirect list, use the following commands. Create a redirect list by entering the list name. CONFIGURATION mode ip redirect-list redirect-list-name redirect-list-name: 16 characters. To delete the redirect list, use the no ip redirect-list command.
Example: Creating a Rule DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#redirect ? A.B.C.D Forwarding router's address DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.3 ? <0-255> An IP protocol number icmp Internet Control Message Protocol ip Any Internet Protocol tcp Transmission Control Protocol udp User Datagram Protocol DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.3 ip ? A.B.C.D Source address any Any source host host A single source host DellEMC(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.3 ip 222.1.1.1 ? Mask A.B.C.
To apply a redirect list to an interface, use the following command. You can apply multiple redirect-lists can be applied to a redirect-group. It is also possible to create two or more redirect-groups on one interface for backup purposes. Apply a redirect list (policy-based routing) to an interface. INTERFACE mode ip redirect-group redirect-list-name test l2–switch • • • redirect-list-name is the name of a redirect list to apply to this interface.
reachable (via Te 1/1/1/1) seq 35 redirect 155.1.1.2 track 5 ip 7.7.7.0/24 8.8.8.0/24, Track 5 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Po 5) seq 30 redirect 155.1.1.2 track 6 icmp host 8.8.8.8 any, Track 5 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Po 5) seq 35 redirect 42.1.1.2 icmp host 8.8.8.8 any, Next-hop reachable (via Vl 20) seq 40 redirect 43.1.1.2 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.0/24, Next-hop reachable (via Vl 30) seq 45 redirect 31.1.1.2 track 200 ip 12.0.0.0 255.0.0.197 13.0.0.0 255.0.0.
Create the Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-2/23/1)#ip redirect-list GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#direct 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)# seq 15 permit ip any any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#show config ! ip redirect-list GOLD description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.
View Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER#show ip redirect-list IP redirect-list GOLD: Defined as: seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any, Next-hop reachable (via Te 3/23/1), ARP resolved seq 10 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.
hop reachable (via Vl 20) Applied interfaces: Te 2/28 DellEMC# Creating a PBR list using Explicit Track Objects for Tunnel Interfaces Creating steps for Tunnel Interfaces: DellEMC#configure terminal DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel destination 40.1.1.2 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel mode ipip DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel keepalive 60.1.1.2 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#ip address 60.1.1.
Verify the Applied Redirect Rules: DellEMC#show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.0/24, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 10 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp any any, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 15 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 udp 155.55.0.0/16 host 144.144.144.144, Track 1 [up], Nexthop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 20 redirect tunnel 2 track 2 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.
37 PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) Implementation Information The following information is necessary for implementing PIM-SM. • • • • • The Dell EMC Networking implementation of PIM-SM is based on IETF Internet Draft draft-ietf-pim-sm-v2-new-05. The platform supports a maximum of 95 IPv4 and IPv6 PIM interfaces and 2000 multicast entries including (*,G), and (S,G) entries. The maximum number of PIM neighbors is the same as the maximum number of PIM-SM interfaces.
Send Multicast Traffic With PIM-SM, all multicast traffic must initially originate from the RP. A source must unicast traffic to the RP so that the RP can learn about the source and create an SPT to it. Then the last-hop DR may create an SPT directly to the source. 1. The source gateway router (first-hop DR) receives the multicast packets and creates an (S,G) entry in its multicast routing table. The first-hop DR encapsulates the initial multicast packets in PIM Register packets and unicasts them to the RP.
INTERFACE mode {ip | ipv6} pim sparse-mode To display which interfaces are enabled with PIM-SM, use the show {ip | ipv6} pim interface command from EXEC Privilege mode. Following is an example of show ip pim interface command output: DellEMC#show ip pim interface Address Interface Ver/ Mode 165.87.34.5 Hu 1/1/1 v2/S 10.1.1.2 Vl 10 v2/S 20.1.1.5 Vl 20 v2/S 165.87.31.200 Vl 30 v2/S Nbr Count 0 1 1 1 Query Intvl 30 30 30 30 DR Prio 1 1 1 1 DR 165.87.34.5 10.1.1.2 20.1.1.5 165.87.31.
(*, 192.1.2.1), uptime 00:29:36, expires 00:03:26, RP 10.87.2.6, flags: SCJ Incoming interface: hundredGigE 1/2/1, RPF neighbor 10.87.3.5 Outgoing interface list: hundredGigE 1/1/1 hundredGigE 1/3/1 (10.87.31.5, 192.1.2.1), uptime 00:01:24, expires 00:02:26, flags: FT Incoming interface: hundredGigE 1/4/1, RPF neighbor 0.0.0.
Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point The rendezvous point (RP) is a PIM-enabled interface on a router that acts as the root a group-specific tree; every group must have an RP. • Identify an RP by the IP address of a PIM-enabled or Loopback interface. {ip | ipv6} pim rp-address address group-address group-address mask [override] Following is an example of IPv4 configuration: DellEMC#show running-configuration interface loop0 ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 1.1.1.
Following is an example of show ip pim rp mapping command output: DellEMC#show ip pim rp mapping PIM Group-to-RP Mappings Group(s): 224.0.0.0/4, Static RP: 165.87.50.5, v2 Following is an example of show ipv6 pim rp mapping command output: Dell#show ipv6 pim rp mapping PIM Group-to-RP Mappings Group(s): ff00::/8, Static RP: 2001:100::1, v2 Dell# Configuring a Designated Router Multiple PIM-SM routers might be connected to a single local area network (LAN) segment.
0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 State-Refresh messages sent/received MSDP updates sent/received Null Register messages sent/received Register-stop messages sent/received Data path event summary: 0 no-cache messages received 0 last-hop switchover messages received 0/0 pim-assert messages sent/received 0/0 register messages sent/received DellEMC# Following is an example of show ipv6 pim interface command output: Dell#show ipv6 pim interface Interface Ver/ Nbr Query DR Mode Count Intvl Prio Hu 1/3/1 v2/S 1 30 1 Address : fe
3. If you configure a secondary VLT peer as an E-BSR and in case of ICL flap or failover, the VLT lag will be down resulting a BSM timeout in the PIM domain and a new BSR will be elected. Hence, it is recommended to configure the primary VLT peer as E-BSR. NOTE: BSR configuration in the multicast topology should ensure that secondary VLT node is not selected as E-BSR. If selected as E-BSR during ICL flap or VLT failover, traffic disruption will be reported.
38 PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) PIM source-specific mode (PIM-SSM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic from a single source to a subnet. In the other versions of protocol independent multicast (PIM), a receiver subscribes to a group only. The receiver receives traffic not just from the source in which it is interested but from all sources sending to that group.
Enabling PIM-SSM To enable PIM-SSM, follow these steps. 1. Create an ACL that uses permit rules to specify what range of addresses should use SSM. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard name 2. Enter the ip pim ssm-range command and specify the ACL you created. CONFIGURATION mode ip pim ssm-range acl-name To display address ranges in the PIM-SSM range, use the show ip pim ssm-range command from EXEC Privilege mode. R1(conf)#do show run pim ! ip pim rp-address 10.11.12.2 group-address 224.0.0.
R1(conf)#ip igmp ssm-map map 10.11.5.2 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime 239.0.0.2 Vlan 300 IGMPv2-Compat 00:00:07 Member Ports: Te 1/1/1 239.0.0.1 Vlan 400 INCLUDE 00:00:10 Never 10.11.4.2 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp ssm-map IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime 239.0.0.2 Vlan 300 IGMPv2-Compat 00:00:36 Member Ports: Te 1/1/1 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp ssm-map 239.0.0.
3. If you configure a secondary VLT peer as an E-BSR and in case of ICL flap or failover, the VLT lag will be down resulting a BSM timeout in the PIM domain and a new BSR will be elected. Hence, it is recommended to configure the primary VLT peer as E-BSR. NOTE: BSR configuration in the multicast topology should ensure that secondary VLT node is not selected as E-BSR. If selected as E-BSR during ICL flap or VLT failover, traffic disruption will be reported.
ip pim [vrf vrf-name] rp-Candidate interface [priority] [acl-name] The specified acl-list is associated to the rp-candidate. NOTE: You can create the ACL list of multicast prefix using the ip access-list standard command.
39 Port Monitoring Port monitoring (also referred to as mirroring ) allows you to monitor ingress and/or egress traffic on specified ports. The mirrored traffic can be sent to a port to which a network analyzer is connected to inspect or troubleshoot the traffic. Mirroring is used for monitoring Ingress or Egress or both Ingress and Egress traffic on a specific port(s). This mirrored traffic can be sent to a port where a network sniffer can connect and monitor the traffic.
configure up to 128 source ports in a monitoring session. Only one destination port is supported in a monitoring session. The platform supports multiple source-destination statements in a single monitor session. The maximum number of source ports that can be supported in a session is 128. The maximum number of destination ports that can be supported depends on the port mirroring directions as follows: • • • 4 per port pipe, if the four destination ports mirror in one direction, either rx or tx.
Configuring Port Monitoring To configure port monitoring, use the following commands. 1. Verify that the intended monitoring port has no configuration other than no shutdown, as shown in the following example. EXEC Privilege mode show interface 2. Create a monitoring session using the command monitor session from CONFIGURATION mode, as shown in the following example. CONFIGURATION mode monitor session monitor session type rpm/erpm type is an optional keyword, required only for rpm and erpm 3.
In the following example, the host and server are exchanging traffic which passes through the uplink interface 1/1/1/1. Port 1/1/1/1 is the monitored port and port 1/1/2/1 is the destination port, which is configured to only monitor traffic received on tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1 (host-originated traffic). Figure 106. Port Monitoring Example Configuring Monitor Multicast Queue To configure monitor QoS multicast queue ID, use the following commands. 1. Configure monitor QoS multicast queue ID.
Behavior of Flow-Based Monitoring You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session using the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this flow-based monitoring, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the interfaces are examined in accordance with the applied ACLs. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. There are two ways in which you can enable flow-based monitoring in Dell EMC Networking OS.
The show ip accounting commands have been enhanced to display whether monitoring is enabled for traffic that matches with the rules of the specific ACL. Example Output of the show Command DellEMC# show ip accounting access-list ! Extended Ingress IP access list kar on TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 Total cam count 1 seq 5 permit ip 192.168.20.0/24 173.168.20.
interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 ip address 10.11.1.254/24 ip access-group testflow in shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#exit DellEMC(conf)#do show ip accounting access-list testflow ! Extended Ingress IP access list testflow on TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 Total cam count 4 seq 5 permit icmp any any 40 monitor 40 count bytes (0 packets 0 bytes) seq 10 permit ip 102.1.1.
NOTE: If you configure IPv6 mirroring without configuring ipv4udfmirracl CAM region, following error message appears. % Error: IPv6 Mirror-Access-list not supported on this CAM profile. Please remove the ipv6 access-group. Enabling IPv6 Flow-Based Monitoring To enable IPv6 flow-based mirroring, use ipv6 access-group access-list-name command under monitor session. You can apply a new IPv6 ACL in a monitor session, when an ACL is already applied. If so, the new ACL will replace the old and overwrite it. 1.
Current Settings(in 1 block = 256 Single Wide Regions: Double Wide Regions: : Triple Wide Regions: L2Acl : 0 Ipv4Acl : 2 Ipv6Acl : 3 Ipv4Qos : 0 L2Qos : 0 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 1 VmanQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 EtsAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl : 0 ipv4udfmirracl*: 3 ipv4mirracl : 0 block sizes) entries Ipv4Acl L2Acl, L2Qos, L2PT FcoeAcl, ipv4pbr, vrfv4Acl Ipv6Acl, VmanQos, Openflow, ipv4udfmirracl(ipv6mirracl) * - shared regions To view an acce
Figure 107. Remote Port Mirroring Configuring Remote Port Mirroring Remote port mirroring requires a source session (monitored ports on different source switches), a reserved tagged VLAN for transporting mirrored traffic (configured on source, intermediate, and destination switches), and a destination session (destination ports connected to analyzers on destination switches).
• • • The reserved VLAN for remote port mirroring can be automatically configured in intermediate switches by using GVRP. There is no restriction on the VLAN IDs used for the reserved remote-mirroring VLAN. Valid VLAN IDs are from 2 to 4094. The default VLAN ID is not supported.
To display the currently configured source and destination sessions for remote port mirroring on a switch, enter the show monitor session command in EXEC Privilege mode.
You can configure the below steps on other source switches to configure additional source ports for this RPM session. 1. Configure a new RPM session and specifying type as rpm defined a RPM session. CONFIGURATION mode monitor session session-id type rpm The session-id needs to be unique. 2. Configure the source ports or list of ports, ingress/egress traffic to be monitored. MONITOR SESSION mode source {interface | range | any} destination remote—vlan vlan-id direction {rx | tx | both} 3.
Following are the port numbers referred in the above illustration: • • • • • • 1 is tengigabitethernet 2 is tengigabitethernet 4 is tengigabitethernet 5 is tengigabitethernet 7 is tengigabitethernet 8 is tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1 1/1/2/1 1/1/4/1 1/1/5/1 1/1/2/1 1/1/8/1 Configuring Remote Port Mirroring on a source switch The below configuration example shows that the source is a source port and the destination is the reserved VLAN (for example, remotevlan 10).
DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#tagged tengigabitethernet 1/1/2/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#exit DellEMC(conf)#monitor session 2 type rpm DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-2)#source vlan 100 destination remote-vlan 20 dir rx DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-2)#no disable DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-2)#flow-based enable DellEMC(conf-mon-sess-2)#exit DellEMC(conf)#mac access-list standard mac_acl DellEMC(config-std-macl)#permit 00:00:00:00:11:22 count monitor DellEMC(config-std-macl)#exit DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 100 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-100)#mac
Configuring Remote Port Mirroring on an intermediate switch Following is a sample configuration of RPM on an intermediate switch. DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 30 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#mode remote-port-mirroring DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#tagged tengigabitethernet 1/1/4/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#tagged tengigabitethernet 1/1/5/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-20)#exit Configuring Remote Port Mirroring on a Destination switch Following is a sample configuration of RPM on a destination switch.
Table 71. Configuration steps for ERPM Step Command Purpose 1 configure terminal Enter global configuration mode. 2 monitor session type erpm Specify a session ID and ERPM as the type of monitoring session, and enter the Monitoring-Session configuration mode. The session number needs to be unique and not already defined. 3 source { interface | range } direction {rx | tx | both} Specify the source port or range of ports.
ERPM Behavior on a typical Dell EMC Networking OS The Dell EMC Networking OS is designed to support only the Encapsulation of the data received / transmitted at the specified source port (Port A). An ERPM destination session / decapsulation of the ERPM packets at the destination Switch are not supported. Figure 109.
• Either have a Linux server's ethernet port ip as the ERPM destination ip or connect the ingress interface of the server to the ERPM MirrorToPort. The analyzer should listen in the forward/egress interface. If there is only one interface, one can choose the ingress and forward interface to be same and listen in the tx direction of the interface. • Download/ Write a small script (for example: erpm.py) such that it will strip the given ERPM packet starting from the bit where GRE header ends.
RPM over VLT Scenarios This section describes the restrictions that apply when you configure RPM in a VLT set up. Consider a simple VLT setup where two VLT peers are connected using VLTi and a top-of-rack switch is connected to both the VLT peers using VLT LAGs in a ring topology. In this setup, the following table describes the possible restrictions that apply when RPM is used to mirror traffic: Table 72.
Scenario RPM Restriction Recommended Solution member port of the VLT LAG is mirrored to rate limit value is configured in the RPM an orphan port on the peer VLT device. The mirror session. packet analyzer is connected to the peer VLT device. Mirroring member port of ICL LAG to VLT LAG — In this scenario, a member port of the ICL LAG is mirrored to the VLT LAG on the same VLT device. The packet analyzer is connected to the TOR switch. No restrictions apply.
40 Private VLANs (PVLAN) The private VLAN (PVLAN) feature is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. For syntax details about the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Private VLANs commands chapter in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Private VLANs extend the Dell EMC Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same virtual local area network (VLAN).
PVLAN port types include: • • Community port — a port that belongs to a community VLAN and is allowed to communicate with other ports in the same community VLAN and with promiscuous ports. Host port — in the context of a private VLAN, is a port in a secondary VLAN: • • • The port must first be assigned that role in INTERFACE mode. • A port assigned the host role cannot be added to a regular VLAN.
Configuration Task List The following sections contain the procedures that configure a private VLAN. • • • • Creating PVLAN Ports Creating a Primary VLAN Creating a Community VLAN Creating an Isolated VLAN Creating PVLAN ports PVLAN ports are ports that will be assigned to the PVLAN. 1. Access INTERFACE mode for the port that you want to assign to a PVLAN. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface 2. Enable the port. INTERFACE mode no shutdown 3. Set the port in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE mode switchport 4.
2. Enable the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no shutdown 3. Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to primary. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode primary 4. Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list The list of secondary VLANs can be: • • • Specified in comma-delimited (VLAN-ID,VLAN-ID) or hyphenated-range format (VLAN-ID-VLAN-ID). Specified with this command even before they have been created.
Creating an Isolated VLAN An isolated VLAN is a secondary VLAN of a primary VLAN. An isolated VLAN port can only talk with the promiscuous ports in that primary VLAN. 1. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode for the VLAN that you want to make an isolated VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 2. Enable the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no shutdown 3. Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to isolated. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode isolated 4. Add one or more host ports to the VLAN.
Private VLAN Configuration Example The following example shows a private VLAN topology. Figure 110. Sample Private VLAN Topology The following configuration is based on the example diagram for the Z9500: • • • • • Te 1/1 and Te 1/23 are configured as promiscuous ports, assigned to the primary VLAN, VLAN 4000. Te 1/25 is configured as a PVLAN trunk port, also assigned to the primary VLAN 4000. Te 1/24 and Te 1/47 are configured as host ports and assigned to the isolated VLAN, VLAN 4003.
• • The S4810 ports would have the same intra-switch communication characteristics as described for the Z9500. For transmission between switches, tagged packets originating from host PVLAN ports in one secondary VLAN and destined for host PVLAN ports in the other switch travel through the promiscuous ports in the local VLAN 4000 and then through the trunk ports (1/25 in each switch). Inspecting the Private VLAN Configuration The standard methods of inspecting configurations also apply in PVLANs.
* 1 100 P 200 I 201 Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive primary VLAN in PVLAN T Te 1/19/1-2 isolated VLAN in VLAN 200 T Te 1/21/1 The following example shows viewing a private VLAN configuration.
41 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Protocol Overview PVST+ is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN). For more information about spanning tree, refer to the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) chapter. Figure 111. Per-VLAN Spanning Tree The Dell EMC Networking OS supports three other variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 73.
Implementation Information • • The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of PVST+ is based on IEEE Standard 802.1w. The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of PVST+ uses IEEE 802.1s costs as the default costs (as shown in the following table). Other implementations use IEEE 802.1w costs as the default costs. If you are using Dell EMC Networking systems in a multivendor network, verify that the costs are values you intended.
To display your PVST+ configuration, use the show config command from PROTOCOL PVST mode. Dell_E600(conf-pvst)#show config verbose ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 100 bridge-priority 4096 Influencing PVST+ Root Selection As shown in the previous per-VLAN spanning tree illustration, all VLANs use the same forwarding topology because R2 is elected the root, and all TenGigabitEthernet ports have the same cost.
To display the PVST+ forwarding topology, use the show spanning-tree pvst [vlan vlan-id] command from EXEC Privilege mode. Dell_E600(conf)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 100 VLAN 100 Root Identifier has priority 4096, Address 0001.e80d.b6d6 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge Identifier has priority 4096, Address 0001.e80d.b6d6 Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 We are the root of VLAN 100 Current root has priority 4096, Address 0001.e80d.
Modifying Interface PVST+ Parameters You can adjust two interface parameters (port cost and port priority) to increase or decrease the probability that a port becomes a forwarding port. • • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port. Port priority — influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost.
shut down when it receives a BPDU. When you only implement bpduguard, although the interface is placed in an Error Disabled state when receiving the BPDU, the physical interface remains up and spanning-tree drops packets in the hardware after a BPDU violation. BPDUs are dropped in the software after receiving the BPDU violation. This feature is the same as PortFast mode in spanning tree. CAUTION: Configure EdgePort only on links connecting to an end station.
Figure 113. PVST+ with Extend System ID • Augment the bridge ID with the VLAN ID. PROTOCOL PVST mode extend system-id DellEMC(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 brief VLAN 5 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32773, Address 0001.e832.73f7 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32773 (priority 32768 sys-id-ext 5), Address 0001.e832.
! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1,1/1/1/2 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 100 bridge-priority 4096 Example of PVST+ Configuration (R2) interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1,1/1/2/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1,1/1/2/1
42 Quality of Service (QoS) This chapter describes how to use and configure Quality of Service service (QoS) features on the switch. Differentiated service is accomplished by classifying and queuing traffic, and assigning priorities to those queues. Table 75.
Feature Direction Specify an Aggregate QoS Policy Egress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing Weighted Random Early Detection Egress Create WRED Profiles Egress Figure 114.
• Enabling Buffer Statistics Tracking Implementation Information The Dell EMC Networking QoS implementation complies with IEEE 802.1p User Priority Bits for QoS Indication.
Honoring dot1p Priorities on Ingress Traffic By default, Dell EMC Networking OS does not honor dot1p priorities on ingress traffic. You can configure this feature on physical interfaces and port-channels, but you cannot configure it on individual interfaces in a port channel. You can configure service-class dynamic dot1p from CONFIGURATION mode, which applies the configuration to all interfaces. A CONFIGURATION mode service-class dynamic dot1p entry supersedes any INTERFACE entries.
• Apply rate shaping to a queue. QoS Policy mode rate-shape DellEMC#configure terminal DellEMC(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#rate shape 500 50 DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#end Policy-Based QoS Configurations Policy-based QoS configurations consist of the components shown in the following example. Figure 115.
Creating a Layer 3 Class Map A Layer 3 class map differentiates ingress packets based on the DSCP value or IP precedence, and characteristics defined in an IP ACL. You can also use VLAN IDs and VRF IDs to classify the traffic using layer 3 class-maps. You may specify more than one DSCP and IP precedence value, but only one value must match to trigger a positive match for the class map. NOTE: IPv6 and IP-any class maps cannot match on ACLs or VLANs. Use step 1 or step 2 to start creating a Layer 3 class map.
Creating a Layer 2 Class Map All class maps are Layer 3 by default; however, you can create a Layer 2 class map by specifying the layer2 option with the classmap command. A Layer 2 class map differentiates traffic according to 802.1p value and/or VLAN and/or characteristics defined in a MAC ACL.. Use Step 1 or Step 2 to start creating a Layer 2 class map. 1. Create a match-any class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-any 2. Create a match-all class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-all 3.
class-map match-any ClassAF1 match ip access-group AF1-FB1 set-ip-dscp 10 match ip access-group AF1-FB2 set-ip-dscp 12 match ip dscp 10 set-ip-dscp 14 match ipv6 dscp 20 set-ip-dscp 14 ! class-map match-all ClassAF2 match ip access-group AF2 match ip dscp 18 DellEMC#show running-config ACL ! ip access-list extended AF1-FB1 seq 5 permit ip host 23.64.0.2 any seq 10 deny ip any any ! ip access-list extended AF1-FB2 seq 5 permit ip host 23.64.0.
But ‘Green’ packets matching the specific match criteria for which ‘color-marking’ is configured will be over-written and marked as “Yellow”. Create a QoS Policy There are two types of QoS policies — input and output. Input QoS policies regulate Layer 3 and Layer 2 ingress traffic. The regulation mechanisms for input QoS policies are rate policing and setting priority values. • • Layer 3 — QoS input policies allow you to rate police and set a DSCP or dot1p value.
qos-policy-output 2. After you configure an output QoS policy, do one or more of the following: Scheduler Strict — Policy-based Strict-priority Queueing configuration is done through scheduler strict. It is applied to Qos-policyoutput. When scheduler strict is applied to multiple Queues, high queue number takes precedence. Allocating Bandwidth to Queue Specifying WRED Drop Precedence Configuring Policy-Based Rate Shaping To configure policy-based rate shaping, use the following command.
• • • Creating a DSCP Color Map Displaying Color Maps Display Color Map Configuration Creating a DSCP Color Map You can create a DSCP color map to outline the differentiated services codepoint (DSCP) mappings to the appropriate color mapping (green, yellow, red) for the input traffic.
Display a specific DSCP color map. DellEMC# show qos dscp-color-map mapTWO Dscp-color-map mapTWO yellow 16,55 Displaying a DSCP Color Policy Configuration To display the DSCP color policy configuration for one or all interfaces, use the show qos dscp-color-policy {summary [interface] | detail {interface}} command in EXEC mode. summary: Displays summary information about a color policy on one or more interfaces.
Honoring DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Dell EMC Networking OS provides the ability to honor DSCP values on ingress packets using Trust DSCP feature. The following table lists the standard DSCP definitions and indicates to which queues Dell EMC Networking OS maps DSCP values. When you configure trust DSCP, the matched packets and matched bytes counters are not incremented in the show qos statistics. Table 78.
• Layer 2 or Layer 3 service policies supersede dot1p service classes. • Create service classes. INTERFACE mode service-class dynamic dot1p Guaranteeing Bandwidth to dot1p-Based Service Queues To guarantee bandwidth to dot1p-based service queues, use the following command. Apply this command in the same way as the bandwidth-percentage command in an output QoS policy (refer to Allocating Bandwidth to Queue).
Applying an Output Policy Map to an Interface To apply an output policy map to an interface, use the following command. • Apply an input policy map to an interface. INTERFACE mode service-policy output You can apply the same policy map to multiple interfaces, and you can modify a policy map after you apply it. Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment By default while rate limiting, policing, and shaping, Dell EMC Networking OS does not include the Preamble, SFD, or the IFG fields.
• On hybrid ports, Queue classification can be based on either Dot1p (for tagged packets) or DSCP (for untagged packets) but not both. Example Case: PFC does not work for tagged traffic, when DSCP based class map is applied on a hybrid port or on a tagged port. Assume two switches A and B are connected back to back. Consider the case where untagged packets arrive on switch A, if you want to generate PFC for priority 2 for DSCP range 0-7, then you have to match the interested traffic.
space for other types. You can apply a WRED profile to a policy-map so that specified traffic can be prevented from consuming too much of the BTM resources. WRED uses a profile to specify minimum and maximum threshold values. The minimum threshold is the allotted buffer space for specified traffic, for example, 1000KB on egress.
Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic After you create a WRED profile, you must specify to which traffic Dell EMC Networking OS should apply the profile. Dell EMC Networking OS assigns a color (also called drop precedence) — red, yellow, or green — to each packet based on it DSCP value before queuing it. DSCP is a 6–bit field. Dell EMC Networking uses the first three bits (LSB) of this field (DP) to determine the drop precedence. • • DP values of 110 and 100, 101 map to yellow; all other values map to green.
12 MCAST 13 MCAST 14 MCAST 15 MCAST 16 MCAST 17 MCAST 18 MCAST 19 MCAST DellEMC# 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Pre-Calculating Available QoS CAM Space Before Dell EMC Networking OS version 7.3.
Specifying Policy-Based Rate Shaping in Packets Per Second You can configure the rate shaping in packets per second (pps) for QoS output policies. You can configure rate shaping in pps for a QoS output policy, apart from specifying the rate shaping value in bytes. You can also configure the peak rate and the committed rate for packets in kilobits per second (Kbps) or pps. Committed rate refers to the guaranteed bandwidth for traffic entering or leaving the interface under normal network conditions.
buffer and traffic manager (BTM) (ingress or egress) can be consumed by only one or few types of traffic, leaving no space for other types. You can apply a WRED profile to a policy-map so that the specified traffic can be prevented from consuming too much of the BTM resources. WRED drops packets when the average queue length exceeds the configured threshold value to signify congestion.
Queue Configuration Service-Pool Configuration WRED Threshold Relationship Expected Functionality Q threshold = Q-T, Service pool threshold = SP-T 0 0 X X X WRED/ECN not applicable 1 0 0 X X Queue based WRED, 1 X Q-T < SP-T SP-T < Q-T No ECN marking SP based WRED, No ECN marking 1 1 0 X X Queue-based ECN marking above queue threshold. 1 X Q-T < SP-T ECN marking to shared buffer limits of the service-pool and then packets are tail dropped.
Guidelines for Configuring ECN for Classifying and Color-Marking Packets Keep the following points in mind while configuring the marking and mapping of incoming packets using ECN fields in IPv4 headers: • Currently Dell EMC Networking OS supports matching only the following TCP flags: • • • • • • ACK FIN SYN PSH RST URG In the existing software, ECE/CWR TCP flag qualifiers are not supported.
On ECN deployment, the non-ECN packets that are transmitted on the ECN-WRED enabled interface will be considered as Green packets and will be subject to the early WRED drops. Typically the TCP-acks, OAM, ICMP ping packets will be non-ECN in nature and it is not desirable for this packets getting WRED dropped. In such a condition, it is necessary that the switch is capable to take differentiated actions for ECN/Non-ECN packets.
• set the packet color as ‘yellow’ and set a new DSCP for the packet This marking action to set the color of the packet is allowed only on the ‘match-any’ logical operator of the class-map.
! class-map match-any class_dscp_40 match ip access-group dscp_40_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_40_ecn ! class-map match-any class_dscp_50 match ip access-group dscp_50_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_50_ecn ! policy-map-input pmap_dscp_40_50 service-queue 2 class-map class_dscp_40 service-queue 3 class-map class_dscp_50 Applying Layer 2 Match Criteria on a Layer 3 Interface To process Layer 3 packets that contain a dot1p (IEEE 802.
1. Create a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface. DellEMC(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 2. Configure the threshold weight of the shared buffer for the queues you want. In this example, this setting is configured for queues 5 and 7. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#Service-class buffer shared-threshold-weight queue5 4 queue7 6 Enabling Buffer Statistics Tracking You can enable the tracking of statistical values of buffer spaces at a global level.
43 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections and is based on a distance-vector algorithm. RIP is based on a distance-vector algorithm; it tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections. RIP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter.
Feature Default • Transmit RIPv1 RIP timers • • • • update timer = 30 seconds invalid timer = 180 seconds holddown timer = 180 seconds flush timer = 240 seconds Auto summarization Enabled ECMP paths supported 16 Configuration Information By default, RIP is disabled in Dell EMC Networking OS. To configure RIP, you must use commands in two modes: ROUTER RIP and INTERFACE.
network 10.0.0.0 DellEMC(conf-router_rip)# When the RIP process has learned the RIP routes, use the show ip rip database command in EXEC mode to view those routes. DellEMC#show ip rip database Total number of routes in RIP database: 978 160.160.0.0/16 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:26, Fa 1/4 160.160.0.0/16 auto-summary 2.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/4 2.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 4.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/4 4.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 8.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 29.10.10.
[120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/49 192.162.3.0/24 auto-summary To disable RIP globally, use the no router rip command in CONFIGURATION mode. Configure RIP on Interfaces When you enable RIP globally on the system, interfaces meeting certain conditions start receiving RIP routes. By default, interfaces that you enable and configure with an IP address in the same subnet as the RIP network address receive RIPv1 and RIPv2 routes and send RIPv1 routes.
• • map-name: the name of a configured route map. Include specific OSPF routes in RIP. ROUTER RIP mode redistribute ospf process-id [match external {1 | 2} | match internal] [metric value] [routemap map-name] Configure the following parameters: • • • process-id: the range is from 1 to 65535. metric: the range is from 0 to 16. map-name: the name of a configured route map. To view the current RIP configuration, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode or the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode.
To confirm that the default route configuration is completed, use the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. Summarize Routes Routes in the RIPv2 routing table are summarized by default, thus reducing the size of the routing table and improving routing efficiency in large networks. By default, the autosummary command in ROUTER RIP mode is enabled and summarizes RIP routes up to the classful network boundary. If you must perform routing between discontiguous subnets, disable automatic summarization.
The following example shows the confirmation when you enable the debug function. DellEMC#debug ip rip RIP protocol debug is ON DellEMC# To disable RIP, use the no debug ip rip command. RIP Configuration Example The examples in this section show the command sequence to configure RIPv2 on the two routers shown in the following illustration — Core 2 and Core 3. The host prompts used in the following example reflect those names.
Core2#show ip rip database Total number of routes in RIP database: 7 10.11.30.0/24 [120/1] via 10.11.20.1, 00:00:03, TenGigabitEthernet 10.300.10.0/24 directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 10.200.10.0/24 directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 10.11.20.0/24 directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 10.11.10.0/24 directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 10.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 192.168.1.0/24 [120/1] via 10.11.20.1, 00:00:03, TenGigabitEthernet 192.168.1.0/24 auto-summary 192.168.2.0/24 [120/1] via 10.11.20.
Distance: (default is 120) Core2# RIP Configuration on Core3 The following example shows how to configure RIPv2 on a host named Core3. Core3(conf)#router rip Core3(conf-router_rip)#version 2 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 192.168.1.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 192.168.2.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.30.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.20.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 10.0.0.0 network 192.168.1.0 network 192.168.2.
C 192.168.1.0/24 Direct, Te C 192.168.2.0/24 Direct, Te Core3# 1/1/1/2 0/0 1/1/1/3 0/0 00:06:53 00:06:26 The following example shows the show ip protocols command to show the RIP configuration activity on Core 3.
! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3/2 ip address 10.11.20.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3/3 ip address 192.168.1.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3/4 ip address 192.168.2.1/24 no shutdown ! router rip version 2 network 10.11.20.0 network 10.11.30.0 network 192.168.1.0 network 192.168.2.
44 Remote Monitoring (RMON) RMON is an industry-standard implementation that monitors network traffic by sharing network monitoring information. RMON provides both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring facility and long-term statistics collection on Dell EMC Networking Ethernet interfaces. RMON operates with the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and monitors all nodes on a local area network (LAN) segment. RMON monitors traffic passing through the router and segment traffic not destined for the router.
[no] rmon hc-alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold value eventnumber falling-threshold value event-number [owner string] Configure the alarm using the following optional parameters: • • • • • • • • • • number: alarm number, an integer from 1 to 65,535, the value must be unique in the RMON Alarm Table. variable: the MIB object to monitor — the variable must be in SNMP OID format; for example, 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.
Configuring RMON Collection Statistics To enable RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface, use the RMON collection statistics command in INTERFACE CONFIGURATION mode. • Enable RMON MIB statistics collection. CONFIGURATION INTERFACE (config-if) mode [no] rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} [owner ownername] • • • • controlEntry: specifies the RMON group of statistics using a value. integer: a value from 1 to 65,535 that identifies the RMON Statistics Table.
45 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Protocol Overview RSTP is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1w — that is essentially the same as spanning-tree protocol (STP) but provides faster convergence and interoperability with switches configured with STP and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP). The Dell EMC Networking OS supports three other variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 82.
RSTP and VLT Virtual link trunking (VLT) provides loop-free redundant topologies and does not require RSTP. RSTP can cause temporary port state blocking and may cause topology changes after link or node failures. Spanning tree topology changes are distributed to the entire Layer 2 network, which can cause a network-wide flush of learned media access control (MAC) and address resolution protocol (ARP) addresses, requiring these addresses to be re-learned.
To verify that RSTP is enabled, use the show config command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode. The bold line indicates that RSTP is enabled. DellEMC(conf-rstp)#show config ! protocol spanning-tree rstp no disable DellEMC(conf-rstp)# Figure 118. Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Globally To view the interfaces participating in RSTP, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output.
The port is not in the Edge port mode Port 379 (TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/4/1) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.379 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.
NOTE: Dell EMC Networking recommends that only experienced network administrators change the Rapid Spanning Tree group parameters. Poorly planned modification of the RSTP parameters can negatively affect network performance. The following table displays the default values for RSTP. Table 83.
Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps, use the following command. • Enable SNMP traps for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ collectively. snmp-server enable traps xstp Modifying Interface Parameters On interfaces in Layer 2 mode, you can set the port cost and port priority values. • • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The previous table lists the default values. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port.
A console message appears when a new root bridge has been assigned. The following example example shows the console message after the bridge-priority command is used to make R2 the root bridge (shown in bold). DellEMC(conf-rstp)#bridge-priority 4096 04:27:59: %RPM0-P:RP2 %SPANMGR-5-STP_ROOT_CHANGE: RSTP root changed. My Bridge ID: 4096:0001.e80b.88bd Old Root: 32768:0001.e801.cbb4 New Root: 4096:0001.e80b.
RSTP fast hellos decrease the hello interval to the order of milliseconds and all timers derived from the hello timer are adjusted accordingly. This feature does not inter-operate with other vendors, and is available only for RSTP. • Configure a hello time on the order of milliseconds. PROTOCOL RSTP mode hello-time milli-second interval The range is from 50 to 950 milliseconds.
46 Software-Defined Networking (SDN) Software-Defined Networking (SDN) 717
47 Security This chapter describes several ways to provide security to the Dell EMC Networking system. For details about all the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell EMC Networking OS Command Reference Guide.
aaa accounting {commands level | dot1x | exec | rest | suppress | system} {default | name} {start-stop | wait-start | stop-only} {radius | tacacs+} The variables are: • • • • • • • • • • • system: sends accounting information of any other AAA configuration. exec: sends accounting information when a user has logged in to EXEC mode. dot1x: sends accounting information when a dot1x user has logged in to EXEC mode. command level: sends accounting of commands executed at the specified privilege level.
Monitoring AAA Accounting Dell EMC Networking OS does not support periodic interim accounting because the periodic command can cause heavy congestion when many users are logged in to the network. No specific show command exists for TACACS+ accounting. To obtain accounting records displaying information about users currently logged in, use the following command. • Step through all active sessions and print all the accounting records for the actively accounted functions.
Acct-Multi-Session-Id = "1e-3c-39-b3-00-00-00-11-33-44-77-88-6c-b3-d5-5cc" Acct-Status-Type = Start Event-Timestamp = "May 10 2019 12:20:43 CDT" Tmp-String-9 = "ai:" Acct-Unique-Session-Id = "2d6c5beef615d18fa21bbde29411f6d5" Timestamp = 1557508843 EAP STOP accounting record: Fri May 10 12:22:15 2019 NAS-IP-Address = 10.16.133.
RADIUS Accounting attributes The following tables describe the various types of attributes that identify the supplicant sessions: Table 84. RADIUS Accounting Start Record Attributes for CLI user RADIUS Attribute code RADIUS Attribute Description 4 NAS-IP-Address IPv4 address of the NAS. 95 NAS-IPv6–Address IPv6 address of the NAS. NAS Identification Attributes Session Identification Attributes 1 User-Name User name. 5 NAS-Port Port on which session is connected (CLI Session-Id).
CLI event Accounting type Attributes CLI user session disconnects due to Dynamic authorization Stop Stop record attributes with termination cause as Admin Reset (6). Table 87. RADIUS Accounting Start Record Attributes for dot1x supplicant RADIUS Attribute code RADIUS Attribute Description 4 NAS-IP-Address IPv4 address of the NAS. 95 NAS-IPv6–Address IPv6 address of the NAS.
RADIUS Attribute code RADIUS Attribute Description 51 Acct-Link-Count 1 46 Acct-Session Time Time the user has received the service. 49 Acct-Terminate-Cause Reason for session termination. 61 NAS-Port-Type Ethernet NOTE: During the administrative initiated reload and system failover events, the accounting Stop records for the 802.1x authorized supplicants are not sent to RADIUS server. Table 89.
AAA Authentication Dell EMC Networking OS supports a distributed client/server system implemented through authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) to help secure networks against unauthorized access.
3. Assign a method-list-name or the default list to the terminal line. LINE mode login authentication {method-list-name | default} To view the configuration, use the show config command in LINE mode or the show running-config in EXEC Privilege mode. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking recommends using the none method only as a backup. This method does not authenticate users. The none and enable methods do not work with secure shell (SSH).
• RADIUS — When using RADIUS authentication, the Dell OS sends an authentication packet with the following: Username: $enab15$ Password: Therefore, the RADIUS server must have an entry for this username. Configuring Re-Authentication Starting from Dell EMC Networking OS 9.11(0.0), the system enables re-authentication of user whenever there is a change in the authenticators.
service obscure-passwords Example of Obscuring Password and Keys DellEMC(config)# service obscure-passwords AAA Authorization Dell EMC Networking OS enables AAA new-model by default. You can set authorization to be either local or remote. Different combinations of authentication and authorization yield different results. By default, Dell EMC Networking OS sets both to local. Privilege Levels Overview Limiting access to the system is one method of protecting the system and your network.
username name [access-class access-list-name] [nopassword | password [encryption-type] password] [privilege level][secret] Configure the optional and required parameters: • • • • • • • name: Enter a text string up to 63 characters long. access-class access-list-name: Enter the name of a configured IP ACL. nopassword: Do not require the user to enter a password. encryption-type: Enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. password: Enter a string. privilege level The range is from 0 to 15.
• • password: Enter a string. Specify the password for the user. Secret: Specify the secret for the user. 2. Configure a password for privilege level. CONFIGURATION mode enable password [level level] [encryption-mode] password Configure the optional and required parameters: • • • level level: specify a level from 0 to 15. Level 15 includes all levels. encryption-type: enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. password: enter a string up to 32 characters long.
DellEMC#? configure Configuring from terminal disable Turn off privileged commands enable Turn on privileged commands exit Exit from the EXEC no Negate a command show Show running system information terminal Set terminal line parameters traceroute Trace route to destination DellEMC#confi DellEMC(conf)#? end Exit from Configuration mode exit Exit from Configuration mode no Reset a command snmp-server Modify SNMP parameters DellEMC(conf)# Specifying LINE Mode Password and Privilege You can specify a password
• Access-Reject — the RADIUS server does not authenticate the user. If an error occurs in the transmission or reception of RADIUS packets, you can view the error by enabling the debug radius command. Transactions between the RADIUS server and the client are encrypted (the users’ passwords are not sent in plain text). RADIUS uses UDP as the transport protocol between the RADIUS server host and the client. For more information about RADIUS, refer to RFC 2865, Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service.
• Set a privilege level. privilege level Configuration Task List for RADIUS To authenticate users using RADIUS, you must specify at least one RADIUS server so that the system can communicate with and configure RADIUS as one of your authentication methods. The following list includes the configuration tasks for RADIUS.
Specifying a RADIUS Server Host When configuring a RADIUS server host, you can set different communication parameters, such as the UDP port, the key password, the number of retries, and the timeout. To specify a RADIUS server host and configure its communication parameters, use the following command. • Enter the host name or IP address of the RADIUS server host.
Monitoring RADIUS To view information on RADIUS transactions, use the following command. • View RADIUS transactions to troubleshoot problems. EXEC Privilege mode debug radius Support for Change of Authorization and Disconnect Messages packets The Network Access Server (NAS) uses RADIUS to authenticate AAA or dot1x user-access to the switch. The RADIUS service does not support unsolicited messages sent from the RADIUS server to the NAS.
Table 91. Change of Authorization (CoA) Attribute Attribute code Attribute Description 5 NAS-Port Port associated with the session to be processed for EAP or MAB users or the VTY ID for AAA sessions. Table 92. Session Identification Attributes Attribute code Attribute Description 31 Calling-Station-Id (MAC Address) The link address from which session is connected. Table 93.
Table 96. CoA EAP/MAB Disable Port Radius Attribute code Radius Attribute Description Mandatory NAS Identification Attributes 4 NAS-IP-Address IPv4 address of the NAS. No 95 NAS-IPv6–Address IPv6 address of the NAS. No Port on which session is terminated Yes t=26(vendor-specific);l=length;vendor-identificationattribute;Length=value; Data=”cmd=bounce-host-port” Yes Description Mandatory Session Identification Attributes 5 NAS-Port Authorization Attributes 26 Vendor-Specific Table 97.
Radius Attribute code Radius Attribute Description Mandatory - AAA user name 5 NAS-Port Port on which session is terminated No t=26(vendor-specific);l=length;vendor-identificationattribute;Length=value; Data=”cmd=disconnect-user” Yes Authorization Attributes 26 Vendor-Specific Error-cause Values It is possible that a Dynamic Authorization Server cannot honor Disconnect Message request or CoA request packets for some reason.
• • • if the CoA request contains incorrect Vendor-Specific attribute value. • if the CoA request contains incorrect NAS-port or calling-station-id values. rejects the CoA-Request containing NAS-IP-Address or NAS-IPV6-Address attribute that does not match the NAS with a CoA-Nak; Error-Cause value is “NAS Identification Mismatch” (403). responds with a CoA-Nak, if it is configured to prohibit honoring of corresponding CoA-Request messages; Error-Cause value is “Administratively Prohibited” (501).
• • • responds to a disconnect message containing unsupported attributes with DM-Nak; Error-Cause value is “Unsupported Attributes” (401). NOTE: Unsupported attributes are the ones that are not mentioned in the RFC 5176 but present in the disconnect message that is received by the NAS. rejects the disconnect message containing NAS-IP-Address or NAS-IPV6-Address attribute that does not match NAS with DM-Nak; Error-Cause value is “NAS Identification Mismatch” (403).
NAS disconnects the administrative users who are connected through an AAA interface. Dell(conf#)radius dynamic-auth Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)disconnect-user NAS takes the following actions: • • • • • validates the DM request and the session identification attributes. sends a DM-Nak with an error-cause of 402 (missing attribute), if the DM request does not contain the User-Name. sends a DM-Ack, if it is able to successfully disconnect the admin user.
2. Enter the following command to configure the re-authentication of 802.1x sessions: coa-reauthenticate NAS re-initiates the user authentication state. Dell(conf#)radius dynamic-auth Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)coa-reauthenticate NAS takes the following actions whenever re-authentication is triggered: • • • • • • • • • • validates the CoA request and the session identification attributes.
• • NAS server listens on the Management IP UDP port 3799 (default) or the port configured through CLI. The user is logged-in through 802.1X enabled physical port and successfully authenticated with Radius Server. To initiate shutting down of the 802.1x enabled port, the DAC sends a standard CoA request that contains one or more session identification attributes. NAS uses the NAS-port attributes to identify the 802.1x enabled physical port. 1.
NAS considers the new replay protection window value from next window period. The range is from 1 to 10 minutes. The default is 5 minutes. Dell(conf-dynamic-auth#)replay-prot-window 10 Rate-limiting RADIUS packets NAS enables you to allow or reject RADIUS dynamic authorization packets based on the rate-limiting value that you specify. NAS lets you to configure number of RADIUS dynamic authorization packets allowed per minute. The default value is 30 packets per minute.
2. Enter a text string (up to 16 characters long) as the name of the method list you wish to use with the TACAS+ authentication method. CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication login {method-list-name | default} tacacs+ [...method3] The TACACS+ method must not be the last method specified. 3. Enter LINE mode. CONFIGURATION mode line {aux 0 | console 0 | vty number [end-number]} 4. Assign the method-list to the terminal line.
TACACS+ Remote Authentication The system takes the access class from the TACACS+ server. Access class is the class of service that restricts Telnet access and packet sizes. If you have configured remote authorization, the system ignores the access class you have configured for the VTY line and gets this access class information from the TACACS+ server. The system must know the username and password of the incoming user before it can fetch the access class from the server.
If rejected by the AAA server, the command is not added to the running config, and a message displays: 04:07:48: %RPM0-P:CP %SEC-3-SEC_AUTHORIZATION_FAIL: Authorization failure Command authorization failed for user (denyall) on vty0 ( 10.11.9.209 ) Certain TACACS+ servers do not authenticate the device if you use the aaa authorization commands level default local tacacs+ command. To resolve the issue, use the aaa authorization commands level default tacacs+ local command.
To disable SSH server functions, use the no ip ssh server enable command. Using SCP with SSH to Copy a Software Image To use secure copy (SCP) to copy a software image through an SSH connection from one switch to another, use the following commands. 1. On Switch 1, set the SSH port number ( port 22 by default). CONFIGURATION MODE ip ssh server port number 2. On Switch 1, enable SSH. CONFIGURATION MODE copy ssh server enable 3. On Switch 2, invoke SCP. CONFIGURATION MODE copy scp: flash: 4.
To remove the generated RSA host keys and zeroize the key storage location, use the crypto key zeroize rsa command in CONFIGURATION mode. DellEMC(conf)#crypto key zeroize rsa Configuring When to Re-generate an SSH Key You can configure the time-based or volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session. If both threshold types are configured, the session rekeys when either one of the thresholds is reached.
• • • • • hmac-md5 hmac-md5-96 hmac-sha1 hmac-sha1-96 hmac-sha2-256 The default HMAC algorithms are the following: • • • • • hmac-sha2-256 hmac-sha1 hmac-sha1-96 hmac-md5 hmac-md5-96 When FIPS is enabled, the default HMAC algorithm is hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-96. Example of Configuring a HMAC Algorithm The following example shows you how to configure a HMAC algorithm list.
no ip ssh password-authentication enable ip ssh server enable Secure Shell Authentication Secure Shell (SSH) is enabled by default using the SSH Password Authentication method. Enabling SSH Authentication by Password Authenticate an SSH client by prompting for a password when attempting to connect to the Dell EMC Networking system. This setup is the simplest method of authentication and uses SSH version 2. To enable SSH password authentication, use the following command.
Enter same passphrase again: Your identification has been saved in /home/admin/.ssh/id_rsa. Your public key has been saved in /home/admin/.ssh/id_rsa.pub. Configuring Host-Based SSH Authentication Authenticate a particular host. This method uses SSH version 2. To configure host-based authentication, use the following commands. 1. Configure RSA Authentication. Refer to Using RSA Authentication of SSH. 2. Create shosts by copying the public RSA key to the file shosts in the directory .
Using Client-Based SSH Authentication To SSH from the chassis to the SSH client, use the following command. If the SSH port is a non-default value, use the ip ssh server port number command to change the default port number. You may only change the port number when SSH is disabled. Then use the -p option with the ssh command. • SSH from the chassis to the SSH client. ssh ip_address DellEMC#ssh 10.16.127.
VTY Line Local Authentication and Authorization retrieves the access class from the local database. To use this feature: 1. 2. 3. 4. Create a username. Enter a password. Assign an access class. Enter a privilege level. You can assign line authentication on a per-VTY basis; it is a simple password authentication, using an access-class as authorization. Configure local authentication globally and configure access classes on a per-user basis.
To apply a MAC ACL on a VTY line, use the same access-class command as IP ACLs. The following example shows how to deny incoming connections from subnet 10.0.0.0 without displaying a login prompt.
For greater security, the ability to view event, audit, and security system log is associated with user roles. For information about these topics, see Audit and Security Logs. Privilege-or-Role Mode versus Role-only Mode By default, the system provides access to commands determined by the user’s role or by the user’s privilege level. The user’s role takes precedence over a user’s privilege level.
System-Defined RBAC User Roles By default, the Dell EMC Networking OS provides 4 system defined user roles. You can create up to 8 additional user roles. NOTE: You cannot delete any system defined roles. The system defined user roles are as follows: • • • • Network Operator (netoperator) - This user role has no privilege to modify any configuration on the switch. You can access Exec mode (monitoring) to view the current configuration and status information.
Example of Creating a User Role The configuration in the following example creates a new user role, myrole, which inherits the security administrator (secadmin) permissions. Create a new user role, myrole and inherit security administrator permissions. DellEMC(conf)#userrole myrole inherit secadmin Verify that the user role, myrole, has inherited the security administrator permissions.
The following example allows the security administrator (secadmin) to access Interface mode.
Adding and Deleting Users from a Role To create a user name that is authenticated based on a user role, use the username name password encryption-type password role role-name command in CONFIGURATION mode. Example The following example creates a user name that is authenticated based on a user role. DellEMC(conf)# username john password 0 password role secadmin The following example deletes a user role.
To configure AAA authorization, use the aaa authorization exec command in CONFIGURATION mode. The aaa authorization exec command determines which CLI mode the user will start in for their session; for example, Exec mode or Exec Privilege mode. For information about how to configure authentication for roles, see Configure AAA Authentication for Roles.
authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin ucraaa ! Configuring TACACS+ and RADIUS VSA Attributes for RBAC For RBAC and privilege levels, the Dell EMC Networking OS RADIUS and TACACS+ implementation supports two vendor-specific options: privilege level and roles. The Dell EMC Networking vendor-ID is 6027 and the supported option has attribute of type string, which is titled “Force10-avpair”.
Applying an Accounting Method to a Role To apply an accounting method list to a role executed by a user with that user role, use the accounting command in LINE mode. accounting {exec | commands {level | role role-name}} method-list Example of Applying an Accounting Method to a Role The following example applies the accounting default method to the user role secadmin (security administrator).
Role access: sysadmin DellEMC##show role mode configure password-attributes Role access: secadmin,sysadmin DellEMC#show role mode configure interface Role access: netadmin, sysadmin DellEMC#show role mode configure line Role access: netadmin,sysadmin Displaying Information About Users Logged into the Switch To display information on all users logged into the switch, using the show users command in EXEC Privilege mode. The output displays privilege level and/or user role.
CONFIGURATION mode ip ssh challenge-response-authentication enable 2. View the configuration. EXEC mode show ip ssh DellEMC# show ip ssh SSH server : enabled. SSH server version : v2. SSH server vrf : default. SSH server ciphers : aes256-ctr,aes256-cbc,aes192-ctr,aes192-cbc,aes128-ctr,aes128cbc,3des-cbc. SSH server macs : hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-96,hmac-md5,hmac-md5-96. SSH server kex algorithms : diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1,diffie-hellman-group1sha1,diffie-hellman-group14-sha1.
ICMPv4 message types Router solicitation (10) Time exceeded (11) IP header bad (12) Timestamp request (13) Timestamp reply (14) Information request (15) Information reply (16) Address mask request (17) Address mask reply (18) NOTE: The Dell EMC Networking OS does not suppress the ICMP message type echo request (8). Table 103.
SSH Lockout Settings The system has a SSH protection mechanism which, by default, allows 10 login attempts (success or failure) per minute. After the 10th attempt, the system blocks the user login for one minute (since the first login attempt) before allowing the next set of login attempts. With Dell EMC Networking OS version 9.11(0.0), the SSH protection mechanism has been enhanced to allow 60 login attempts (success or failure) per minute.
After enabling and configuring OS image hash verification, the device verifies the hash checksum of the OS boot image during every reload. DellEMC# verified boot hash system-image A: 619A8C1B7A2BC9692A221E2151B9DA9E Image Verification for Subsequent OS Upgrades After enabling OS image hash verification, for subsequent Dell EMC Networking OS upgrades, you must enter the hash checksum of the new OS image file.
NOTE: The verified boot hash command is only applicable for the startup configuration file in the local file system. After enabling and configuring startup configuration verification, the device verifies the hash checksum of the startup configuration during every reload. DellEMC# verified boot hash startup—config 619A8C1B7A2BC9692A221E2151B9DA9E Configuring the root User Password For added security, you can change the root user password.
• A minimum of one special character including a space (" !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~") If you enable the boot access password, the system prompts for a password when you access the GRUB interface. DellEMC(conf)#boot-access password 7 Hg$7^5HMoiY% *********************************************************************** * Warning - boot-access password will enable password protection in * * GRUB. Keep it safe. Forgetting this password and the CLI password * * may result in switch becoming inaccessible.
48 Service Provider Bridging VLAN Stacking VLAN stacking, also called Q-in-Q, is defined in IEEE 802.1ad — Provider Bridges, which is an amendment to IEEE 802.1Q — Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks. It enables service providers to use 802.1Q architecture to offer separate VLANs to customers with no coordination between customers, and minimal coordination between customers and the provider. Using only 802.
Figure 119. VLAN Stacking in a Service Provider Network Important Points to Remember • • • Interfaces that are members of the Default VLAN and are configured as VLAN-Stack access or trunk ports do not switch untagged traffic. To switch traffic, add these interfaces to a non-default VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN. Dell EMC Networking cautions against using the same MAC address on different customer VLANs, on the same VLAN-Stack VLAN.
• • Debugging VLAN Stacking VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks Creating Access and Trunk Ports To create access and trunk ports, use the following commands. • • Access port — a port on the service provider edge that directly connects to the customer. An access port may belong to only one service provider VLAN. Trunk port — a port on a service provider bridge that connects to another service provider bridge and is a member of multiple service provider VLANs.
The default is 9100. To display the S-Tag TPID for a VLAN, use the show running-config command from EXEC privilege mode. Dell EMC Networking OS displays the S-Tag TPID only if it is a non-default value. Configuring Dell EMC Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports 802.1ad trunk ports may also be tagged members of a VLAN so that it can carry single and double-tagged traffic. You can enable trunk ports to carry untagged, single-tagged, and double-tagged VLAN traffic by making the trunk port a hybrid port.
• • • T — 802.1Q trunk port U — 802.1Q access port NU — Native VLAN (untagged) DellEMC# debug member vlan 603 vlan id : 603 ports : Te 1/1/2/1 (MT), Te 1/1/3/1(MU), 1/1/3/2(MT), Te 1/1/3/3(MT), Te 1/1/3/4(MU) DellEMC#debug member port tengigabitethernet 1/1/2/1 vlan id : 603 (MT), 100(T), 101(NU) DellEMC# VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks The first field in the VLAN tag is the tag protocol identifier (TPID), which is 2 bytes.
Figure 120.
Figure 121.
Figure 122. Single and Double-Tag TPID Mismatch VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence VLAN stacking packet-drop precedence is supported on the switch. The drop eligible indicator (DEI) bit in the S-Tag indicates to a service provider bridge which packets it should prefer to drop when congested. Enabling Drop Eligibility Enable drop eligibility globally before you can honor or mark the DEI value. When you enable drop eligibility, DEI mapping or marking takes place according to the defaults.
Ingress Egress Access Port Trunk Port DEI Disabled DEI Enabled Retain outer tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0. Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0 Set outer tag CFI to 0 To enable drop eligibility globally, use the following command. • Make packets eligible for dropping based on their DEI value. CONFIGURATION mode dei enable By default, packets are colored green, and DEI is marked 0 on egress.
-------------------------------Te 1/1/1 Green 0 Te 1/1/1 Yellow 1 Te 2/9/1 Yellow 0 Te 2/10/1 Yellow 0 Dynamic Mode CoS for VLAN Stacking One of the ways to ensure quality of service for customer VLAN-tagged frames is to use the 802.1p priority bits in the tag to indicate the level of QoS desired. When an S-Tag is added to incoming customer frames, the 802.1p bits on the S-Tag may be configured statically for each customer or derived from the C-Tag using Dynamic Mode CoS.
qos-policy-input 3 layer2 rate-police 40 Likewise, in the following configuration, packets with dot1p priority 0–3 are marked as dot1p 7 in the outer tag and queued to Queue 3. Rate policing is according to qos-policy-input 3. All other packets will have outer dot1p 0 and hence are queued to Queue 1. They are therefore policed according to qos-policy-input 1.
Figure 124. VLAN Stacking without L2PT You might need to transport control traffic transparently through the intermediate network to the other region. Layer 2 protocol tunneling enables BPDUs to traverse the intermediate network by identifying frames with the Bridge Group Address, rewriting the destination MAC to a user-configured non-reserved address, and forwarding the frames.
Figure 125. VLAN Stacking with L2PT Implementation Information • • • L2PT is available for STP, RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ BPDUs. No protocol packets are tunneled when you enable VLAN stacking. L2PT requires the default CAM profile. Enabling Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. 1. Verify that the system is running the default CAM profile. Use this CAM profile for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-profile 2.
protocol-tunnel stp Specifying a Destination MAC Address for BPDUs By default, Dell EMC Networking OS uses a Dell EMC Networking-unique MAC address for tunneling BPDUs. You can configure another value. To specify a destination MAC address for BPDUs, use the following command. • Overwrite the BPDU with a user-specified destination MAC address when BPDUs are tunneled across the provider network.
The same is true for GARP VLAN registration protocol (GVRP). 802.1ad specifies that provider bridges participating in GVRP use a reserved destination MAC address called the Provider Bridge GVRP Address, 01-80-C2-00-00-0D, to exchange GARP PDUs instead of the GVRP Address, 01-80-C2-00-00-21, specified in 802.1Q. Only bridges in the service provider network use this destination MAC address so these bridges treat GARP PDUs originating from the customer network as normal data frames, rather than consuming them.
49 sFlow sFlow is a standard-based sampling technology embedded within switches and routers which is used to monitor network traffic. It is designed to provide traffic monitoring for high-speed networks with many switches and routers.
To avoid the back-off, either increase the global sampling rate or configure all the line card ports with the desired sampling rate even if some ports have no sFlow configured. Important Points to Remember • • • • • • • • • The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of the sFlow MIB supports sFlow configuration via snmpset. By default, sFlow collection is supported only on data ports.
If you did not enable any extended information, the show output displays the following (shown in bold). DellEMC#show sflow sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 Global extended information enabled: none 0 collectors configured 0 UDP packets exported 0 UDP packets dropped 0 sFlow samples collected 0 sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling Enabling and Disabling sFlow on an Interface By default, sFlow is disabled on all interfaces.
sFlow Show Commands Dell EMC Networking OS includes the following sFlow display commands. • • • Displaying Show sFlow Globally Displaying Show sFlow on an Interface Displaying Show sFlow on a Line Card Displaying Show sFlow Global To view sFlow statistics, use the following command. • Display sFlow configuration information and statistics. EXEC mode show sflow The first bold line indicates sFlow is globally enabled.
Displaying Show sFlow on a Stack-unit To view sFlow statistics on a specified Stack-unit, use the following command. • Display sFlow configuration information and statistics on the specified interface.
sFlow on LAG ports When a physical port becomes a member of a LAG, it inherits the sFlow configuration from the LAG port. Enabling Extended sFlow Extended sFlow packs additional information in the sFlow datagram depend on the type of sampled packet. The platform supports extended-switch information processing only. Extended sFlow packs additional information in the sFlow datagram depending on the type of sampled packet. You can enable the following options: • • • extended-switch — 802.1Q VLAN ID and 802.
• The sFlow sampling functionality is supported only for egress traffic and not for ingress traffic. The previous points are summarized in following table. Table 105. Extended Gateway Summary IP SA IP DA srcAS and srcPeerAS dstAS and dstPeerAS Description static/connected/IGP static/connected/IGP — — Extended gateway data is not exported because there is no AS information. static/connected/IGP BGP 0 Exported src_as and src_peer_as are zero because there is no AS information for IGP.
50 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is designed to manage devices on IP networks by monitoring device operation, which might require administrator intervention. NOTE: On Dell EMC Networking routers, standard and private SNMP management information bases (MIBs) are supported, including all Get and a limited number of Set operations (such as set vlan and copy cmd).
• • • • Monitor Port-Channels Troubleshooting SNMP Operation Transceiver Monitoring Configuring SNMP context name Protocol Overview Network management stations use SNMP to retrieve or alter management data from network elements. A datum of management information is called a managed object; the value of a managed object can be static or variable. Network elements store managed objects in a database called a management information base (MIB).
SHA authentication needs to be used with the AES-CFB128 privacy algorithm only when FIPS is enabled because SHA is then the only available authentication level. If FIPS is disabled, you can use MD5 authentication in addition to SHA authentication with the AES-CFB128 privacy algorithm You cannot modify the FIPS mode if SNMPv3 users are already configured and present in the system.
SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is a user-based security model that provides password authentication for user security and encryption for data security and privacy. Three sets of configurations are available for SNMP read/write operations: no password or privacy, password privileges, password and privacy privileges. You can configure a maximum of 16 users even if they are in different groups.
• snmp-server group groupname {oid-tree} auth read name write name Configure an SNMPv3 view. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server view view-name 3 noauth {included | excluded} NOTE: To give a user read and write privileges, repeat this step for each privilege type. • Configure an SNMP group (with password or privacy privileges). • CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server group group-name {oid-tree} priv read name write name Configure the user with a secure authorization password and privacy password.
The following example shows reading the value of the next managed object. > snmpgetnext -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0 SNMPv2-MIB::sysContact.0 = STRING: > snmpgetnext -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 sysContact.0 The following example shows reading the value of the many managed objects at one time. > snmpwalk -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 .1.3.6.1.2.1.1 SNMPv2-MIB::sysDescr.0 = STRING: Dell EMC Real Time Operating System Software Dell Operating System Version: 1.
• (From a management station) Identify the physical location of the system (for example, San Jose, 350 Holger Way, 1st floor lab, rack A1-1). CONFIGURATION mode snmpset -v version -c community agent-ip sysLocation.0 s “location-info” You may use up to 55 characters. The default is None. Subscribing to Managed Object Value Updates using SNMP By default, the Dell EMC Networking system displays some unsolicited SNMP messages (traps) upon certain events and conditions.
NOTE: The envmon option enables all environment traps including those traps that are enabled with the envmon supply, envmon temperature, and envmon fan options. NOTE: You must configure notify option for the SNMPv3 traps to work. Enabling an SNMP Agent to Notify Syslog Server Failure You can configure a network device to send an SNMP trap if an audit processing failure occurs due to loss of connectivity with the syslog server.
Following is the sample audit log message that other syslog servers that are reachable receive: Oct 21 05:26:04: dv-fedgov-s4810-6: %EVL-6-REACHABLE:Syslog server 10.11.226.121 (port: 9140) is reachable Copy Configuration Files Using SNMP To do the following, use SNMP from a remote client.
MIB Object OID Object Values Description 3 = tftp • 4 = ftp 5 = scp If copyDestFileLocation is FTP or SCP, you must specify copyServerAddress, copyUserName, and copyUserPassword. copyDestFileName .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.7 Path (if the file is not in the default directory) and filename. Specifies the name of destination file. copyServerAddress .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.8 IP Address of the server. The IP address of the server. • copyUserName .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.
The following examples show the snmpset command to copy a configuration. These examples assume that: • • • • the server OS is UNIX you are using SNMP version 2c the community name is public the file f10-copy-config.mib is in the current directory or in the snmpset tool path Copying Configuration Files via SNMP To copy the running-config to the startup-config from the UNIX machine, use the following command. • Copy the running-config to the startup-config from the UNIX machine.
• • precede server-ip-address by the keyword a. precede the values for copyUsername and copyUserPassword by the keyword s. > snmpset -v 2c -c private -m ./f10-copy-config.mib 10.10.10.10 copySrcFileType.110 i 2 copyDestFileName.110 s /home/startup-config copyDestFileLocation.110 i 4 copyServerAddress.110 a 11.11.11.11 copyUserName.110 s mylogin copyUserPassword.110 s mypass FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copySrcFileType.110 = INTEGER: runningConfig(2) FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copyDestFileName.
MIB Object OID Values Description copyTimeCompleted .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.13 Time value Specifies the point in the uptime clock that the copy operation completed. copyFailCause .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.14 1 = bad filename Specifies the reason the copy request failed. 2 = copy in progress 3 = disk full 4 = file exists 5 = file not found 6 = timeout 7 = unknown copyEntryRowStatus .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.15 Row status Specifies the state of the copy operation.
MIB Support to Display Reason for Last System Reboot Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the reason for the last system reboot. The dellNetProcessorResetReason object contains the reason for the last system reboot. The following table lists the related MIB objects. Table 110. MIB Objects for Displaying Reason for Last System Reboot MIB Object OID Description dellNetProcessorResetReason 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.3.1.7 This is the table that contains the reason for last system reboot.
SNMP Walk Example Output snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.131.156 1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.5.11 = INTEGER: 48 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.5.12 = INTEGER: 40 snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.131.156 1.3.6.1.4.1.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.6.11 = INTEGER: 31 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.674.10895.3000.1.2.110.7.2.1.6.12 = INTEGER: 26 snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.131.
SNMP Example Output (Single Interface) DellEMC$ snmpwalk -v 2c -c public -m all -M 10.16.150.140 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.11.1.3 | grep 2112517 DELL-NETWORKING-IF-EXTENSION-MIB::dellNetIfTransDeviceName.2112517 = STRING: "stack-unit-1 port-31" DELL-NETWORKING-IF-EXTENSION-MIB::dellNetIfTransPort.2112517 = STRING: "Fo 1/49/1" DELL-NETWORKING-IF-EXTENSION-MIB::dellNetIfTransOpticsPresent.2112517 = INTEGER: true(1) DELL-NETWORKING-IF-EXTENSION-MIB::dellNetIfTransOpticsType.
MIB Support to Display the Software Core Files Generated by the System Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the software core files generated by the system. The chSysSwCoresTable contains the list of software core files generated by the system. The following table lists the related MIB objects. Table 114. MIB Objects for Displaying the Software Core Files Generated by the System MIB Object OID Description chSysSwCoresTable 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.
MIB Support for PFC Storm Control Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the information for PFC Storm Control. The OIDs specific to PFC Storm Control are appended to the dellNetFpStatsMib. These statistics can also be obtained by using the CLI commands:show storm-control pfc status stack-unit <> port-set <> and show storm-control pfc statistics stack-unit <> port-set <>. The following table lists the related MIB objects, OID and description for the same: Table 115.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.2.2097925.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.3.2097157.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.3.2097157.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.3.2097413.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.3.2097413.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.3.2097669.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.3.2097669.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.3.2097925.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.3.2097925.
Table 116. MIB Objects to Display the Information for PFC no-drop-priority L2Dlf Drop MIB Object OID Description dellNetFpPfcL2DlfDropCounterTable 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.22 Table to show the drop counters of pfcnodrop-priority l2-dlf drop. dellNetFpPfcL2DlfDropCounterEntry 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.22.1 Table entry to show the drop counters of pfc-nodrop-priority l2-dlf drop. dellNetFpPfcL2DlfDropCounters 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.22.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.4.1.1.4 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.5.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.5.1.1.2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.5.1.1.3 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.5.1.1.
MIB Support to Display the Available Partitions on Flash Dell EMC Networking provides MIB objects to display the information of various partitions such as /flash, /tmp, /usr/pkg, and /f10/ConfD. The dellNetFlashStorageTable table contains the list of all partitions on disk. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 119. MIB Objects to Display the Available Partitions on Flash MIB Object OID Description dellNetFlashPartitionNumber 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.1 Index for the table.
.1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.4 = INTEGER: 400528 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.5 = INTEGER: 60 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.1 = INTEGER: 3872014 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.2 = INTEGER: 56527 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.3 = INTEGER: 138860 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.4 = INTEGER: 1608180 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.5 = INTEGER: 51140 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.1 = STRING: "/usr/pkg" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.2 = STRING: "/tmpimg" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.
Viewing the ECMP Group Count Information • To view the ECMP group count information generated by the system, use the following command. snmpwalk -c public -v 2c 10.16.151.191 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.9 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.1.1.2.1.1 = Counter64: 79 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.1.1.2.1.2 = Counter64: 1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.3.0 = Gauge32: 18 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.4.0 = Gauge32: 1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.10.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.
"" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.90.90.90.2.32.1.4.90.90.90.2.1.4.90.90.90.2 = Hex-STRING: 00 00 DA FE 04 0B SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.100.100.100.0.24.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.1 = Hex-STRING: 4C 76 25 F4 AB 02 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.100.100.100.0.24.1.4.20.1.1.1.1.4.20.1.1.1 = Hex-STRING: 4C 76 25 F4 AB 02 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.100.100.100.0.24.1.4.30.1.1.1.1.4.30.1.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.80.80.80.0.24.1.4.30.1.1.1.1.4.30.1.1.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.90.90.90.0.24.0.0.0.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.90.90.90.1.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.90.90.90.2.32.1.4.90.90.90.2.1.4.90.90.90.2 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.100.100.100.0.24.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.
MIB Object OID Description dellNetFpEgIPv4L3UCAgedDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.16 IPv4 L3 UC Aged and Drops. dellNetFpEgTTLThresholdDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.17 TTL Threshold Drops. dellNetFpEgInvalidVLANCounterDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.18 Invalid VLAN Counter Drops. dellNetFpEgL2MCDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.19 L2 MC Drops. dellNetFpEgPktDropsOfAnyCondition 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.20 Packet Drops of ANY Conditions. dellNetFpEgHgMacUnderFlow 1.3.6.1.4.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2108942 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2109454 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2109966 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2110478 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2110990 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2111502 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2112014 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2112526 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.2113038 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2102798 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2103310 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2103822 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2104334 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2104846 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2105358 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2105870 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2106382 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.2106894 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.27.
.1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.2.30.0 = OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.2100356 .1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.2.31.0 = OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.2100484 MIB Support for LAG Dell EMC Networking provides a method to retrieve the configured LACP information (Actor and Partner). Actor (local interface) is to designate the parameters and flags pertaining to the sending node, while the term Partner (remote interface) is to designate the sending node’s view of its peer parameters and flags.
MIB Object OID Description delivering the frame to its MAC Client or discarding the frame. dot3adAggPortListTable 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.2 Contains a list of all the ports associated with each Aggregator. Each LACP channel in a device occupies an entry in the table. dot3adAggPortListEntry 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.2.1 Contains a list of ports associated with a given Aggregator and indexed by the ifIndex of the Aggregator. dot3adAggPortListPorts 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.2.1.
snmpwalk -v2c -c mycommunity 10.16.150.83 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.2113029.2 = INTEGER: 5 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.3161092.6 = INTEGER: 5 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.3161605.2 = INTEGER: 5 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.4209668.6 = INTEGER: 5 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.4210181.2 = INTEGER: 5 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.6.0.9437185.2 = INTEGER: 5 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.7.0.2113029.2 = STRING: "fortyGigE 1/50" iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.1.1.7.0.3161092.
snmpwalk -v2c -c public 10.16.150.83 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4.1.4 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4.1.4.0.3161092.1.0.1.102.1.133 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4.1.4.0.3161092.1.0.1.102.2.134 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4.1.4.0.3161092.1.0.1.102.3.135 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4.1.4.0.3161092.1.0.1.102.4.136 iso.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4.1.4.0.3161092.1.0.1.102.5.137 = = = = = STRING: STRING: STRING: STRING: STRING: "Dell" "Dell" "Dell" "Dell" "Dell" snmpget -v2c -c public 10.16.150.102 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.4.4.1.4.0.1048580.2.0.1.232.16.1 iso.0.
MIB Object OID Access or Permission Description dellNetPortSecIfSecureMacLimit 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1.1.3 read-write Maximum number (N) of MAC addresses to be secured on the interface dellNetPortSecIfCurrentMacCou 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1.1.4 nt read-only Current number of MAC addresses learnt or configured on this interface dellNetPortSecIfStationMoveEn 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.1.1.
MAC addresses cannot be retrieved using dellNetPortSecSecureStaticMacAddrTable and dellNetPortSecSecureMacAddrTable. These tables are valid only if port security feature is enabled globally in the system. Table 130. MIB Objects for configuring MAC addresses MIB Object OID dellNetPortSecIfSecureStaticMa 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.31.1.2.2.1.4 cRowStatus Access or Permission Description read-write Allows adding or deleting entries to or from the table dellNetPortSecSecureStaticMac AddrTable.
MIB Support for CAM Dell EMC Networking provides a method to retrieve the CAM usage information. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 132. MIB Objects for CAM MIB Object OID Description camUsageL2Pip 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.7.1.1.2.1.11 eLine Contains information about the pipe line number of the chip on the layer 2 switch where CAM is located. camUsageL3Pip 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.7.1.1.3.1.
MIB support for MAC notification traps Dell EMC Networking OS provides MIB support to generate SNMP trap messages on learning or station move of a new or existing MAC address in the system with mac–address, vlan–id, and port details. The following table lists the related MIB objects, OID, and description for the same: Table 133. MIB Objects for MAC notification traps MIB Object OID Description dellNetMacNotifMib 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.28.1 Contains the MAC notification groups.
Assigning a VLAN Alias Write a character string to the dot1qVlanStaticName object to assign a name to a VLAN. [Unix system output] > snmpset -v2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.185 .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.1.1107787786 s "My VLAN" SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.1.
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00" SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.2.1107787786 = Hex-STRING: 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.4.
Fetch Dynamic MAC Entries using SNMP Dell EMC Networking supports the RFC 1493 dot1d table for the default VLAN and the dot1q table for all other VLANs. NOTE: The 802.1q Q-BRIDGE MIB defines VLANs regarding 802.1d, as 802.1d itself does not define them. As a switchport must belong a VLAN (the default VLAN or a configured VLAN), all MAC address learned on a switchport are associated with a VLAN. For this reason, the Q-Bridge MIB is used for MAC address query.
1000 00:01:e8:06:95:ac Dynamic Po 1 Active -------------Query from Management Station--------------------->snmpwalk -v 2c -c techpubs 10.11.131.162 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2.1.1.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.5.1.1.1000.0.1.232.6.149.172.1 = SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.5.1.2.1000.0.1.232.6.149.172.1 = 06 95 AC SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.5.1.3.1000.0.1.232.6.149.172.1 = SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.5.1.4.1000.0.1.232.6.149.172.
• snmp-server community vrf2 ro • snmp-server context context1 • snmp-server context context2 • snmp mib community-map vrf1 context context1 • snmp mib community-map vrf1 context context2 2. Configure snmp context under the VRF instances. • • • • • • • • • • • • • sho run bgp router bgp 100 address-family ipv4 vrf vrf1 snmp context context1 neighbor 20.1.1.1 remote-as 200 neighbor 20.1.1.1 no shutdown exit-address-family address-family ipv4 vrf vrf2 snmp context context2 timers bgp 30 90 neighbor 30.1.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.20.1.2.3.2.1.4.0.1.20.1.1.2.1.20.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.20.1.2.3.2.1.5.0.1.20.1.1.2.1.20.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.20.1.2.3.3.1.1.0.1.20.1.1.2.1.20.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.20.1.2.3.3.1.2.0.1.20.1.1.2.1.20.1.1.
Layer 3 LAG does not include this support. SNMP trap works for the Layer 2 / Layer 3 / default mode LAG. Example of Viewing Changed Interface State for Monitored Ports SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (8500842) 23:36:48.42 SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: IF-MIB::linkDown IF-MIB::ifIndex.33865785 = INTEGER: 33865785 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.1.1.4.1.2 = STRING: "OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Te 1/1/1" 2010-02-10 14:22:39 10.16.130.4 [10.16.130.4]: SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.18.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.19.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.20.2113540 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.21.2113540 = = = = STRING: "7.530000" "" "" "" Table 136. SNMP OIDs for Transceiver Monitoring Field (OID) Description SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.1 Device Name SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.2 Port SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.
51 Storm Control Storm control allows you to control unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces. Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) Behavior: Dell EMC Networking OS supports unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast control for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. To view the storm control broadcast configuration show storm-control broadcast | multicast | unknown-unicast | pfc-llfc[interface] command.
• storm-control multicast packets_per_second in Shut down the port if it receives the PFC/LLFC packets more than the configured rate. INTERFACE mode storm-control pfc-llfc pps in shutdown NOTE: PFC/LLFC storm control enabled interface disables the interfaces if it receives continuous PFC/LLFC packets. It can be a result of a faulty NIC/Switch that sends spurious PFC/LLFC packets.
Restore Queue Drop State You can restore the queue drop triggered due to the storm control PFC detection to the normal state. Once the storm control PFC is detected on a port or priority, you can activate the queue drop action. You can restore the dropped queue to normal state on the following conditions. • You can restore the queue after a particular period of time. Use the queue-drop backoff-force polling—count command to remove the queue-drop state after the specified number of polling is done.
5 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 DellEMC# Storm Control 841
52 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The spanning tree protocol (STP) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS.
• • • • • Enabling PortFast Prevent Network Disruptions with BPDU Guard STP Root Guard Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes Configuring Spanning Trees as Hitless Important Points to Remember • • • • • STP is disabled by default. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports only one spanning tree instance (0). For multiple instances, enable the multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) or per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). You may only enable one flavor of spanning tree at any one time.
1. If the interface has been assigned an IP address, remove it. INTERFACE mode no ip address 2. Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE switchport 3. Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown To verify that an interface is in Layer 2 mode and enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode.
CONFIGURATION mode protocol spanning-tree 0 2. Enable STP. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode no disable To disable STP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the disable command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode. To verify that STP is enabled, use the show config command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode.
Adding an Interface to the Spanning Tree Group To add a Layer 2 interface to the spanning tree topology, use the following command. • Enable spanning tree on a Layer 2 interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree 0 Modifying Global Parameters You can modify the spanning tree parameters. The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, and max-age and overwrites the values set on other bridges participating in STP.
PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. Refer to the second example in Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally. Modifying Interface STP Parameters You can set the port cost and port priority values of interfaces in Layer 2 mode. • • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type.
no shutdown DellEMC#(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)# Prevent Network Disruptions with BPDU Guard Configure the Portfast (and Edgeport, in the case of RSTP, PVST+, and MSTP) feature on ports that connect to end stations. End stations do not generate BPDUs, so ports configured with Portfast/ Edgport (edgeports) do not expect to receive BDPUs. If an edgeport does receive a BPDU, it likely means that it is connected to another part of the network, which can negatively affect the STP topology.
Figure 128. Enabling BPDU Guard Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior BPDU guard: • • is used on edgeports and blocks all traffic on edgeport if it receives a BPDU. drops the BPDU after it reaches the RP and generates a console message. Example of Blocked BPDUs DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/7/1)#do show spanning-tree rstp brief Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e805.fb07 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.
Selecting STP Root The STP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it becomes the root bridge. You can also specify that a bridge is the root or the secondary root. To change the bridge priority or specify that a bridge is the root or secondary root, use the following command. • Assign a number as the bridge priority or designate it as the root or secondary root.
Figure 129. STP Root Guard Prevents Bridging Loops Configuring Root Guard Enable STP root guard on a per-port or per-port-channel basis. Dell EMC Networking OS Behavior: The following conditions apply to a port enabled with STP root guard: • • • • • Root guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface except when used as a stacking port.
To verify the STP root guard configuration on a port or port-channel interface, use the show spanning-tree 0 guard [interface interface] command in a global configuration mode. Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps individually or collectively, use the following commands. • • Enable SNMP traps for spanning tree state changes. snmp-server enable traps stp Enable SNMP traps for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ collectively.
Figure 130. STP Loop Guard Prevents Forwarding Loops Configuring Loop Guard Enable STP loop guard on a per-port or per-port channel basis. The following conditions apply to a port enabled with loop guard: • • Loop guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface.
• • If no BPDU is received from a remote device, loop guard places the port in a Loop-Inconsistent Blocking state and no traffic is forwarded on the port. When used in a PVST+ network, STP loop guard is performed per-port or per-port channel at a VLAN level. If no BPDUs are received on a VLAN interface, the port or port-channel transitions to a Loop-Inconsistent (Blocking) state only for this VLAN. To enable a loop guard on an STP-enabled port or port-channel interface, use the following command.
53 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell EMC Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell EMC Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell EMC Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell EMC Networking Open Automation guide. Figure 131.
Enable the SupportAssist service. CONFIGURATION mode support-assist activate DellEMC(conf)#support-assist activate This command guides you through steps to configure SupportAssist. Configuring SupportAssist Manually To manually configure SupportAssist service, use the following commands. 1. Accept the end-user license agreement (EULA). CONFIGURATION mode eula-consent {support-assist} {accept | reject} NOTE: Once accepted, you do not have to accept the EULA again.
support-assist DellEMC(conf)#support-assist DellEMC(conf-supportassist)# 3. (Optional) Configure the contact information for the company. SUPPORTASSIST mode contact-company name {company-name}[company-next-name] ... [company-next-name] DellEMC(conf)#support-assist DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#contact-company name test DellEMC(conf-supportassist-cmpy-test)# 4. (Optional) Configure the contact name for an individual.
[no] activity {full-transfer|core-transfer|event-transfer} DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#activity full-transfer DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#activity core-transfer DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-core-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist)#activity event-transfer DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# 2. Copy an action-manifest file for an activity to the system.
[no] enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-core-transfer)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-core-transfer)# DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)#enable DellEMC(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# Configuring SupportAssist Company SupportAssist Company mode allows you to configure name, address and territory information of the company.
SUPPORTASSIST PERSON mode [no] email-address primary email-address [alternate email-address] DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)#email-address primary jdoe@mycompany.com DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)# 3. Configure phone numbers of the contact person. SUPPORTASSIST PERSON mode [no] phone primary phone [alternate phone] DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)#phone primary +919999999999 DellEMC(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)# 4. Configure the preferred method for contacting the person.
[no] url uniform-resource-locator DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#url https://192.168.1.1/index.htm DellEMC(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# Viewing SupportAssist Configuration To view the SupportAssist configurations, use the following commands: 1. Display information on the SupportAssist feature status including any activities, status of communication, last time communication sent, and so on.
show eula-consent {support-assist | other feature} DellEMC#show eula-consent support-assist SupportAssist EULA has been: Accepted Additional information about the SupportAssist EULA is as follows: By installing SupportAssist, you allow Dell to save your contact information (e.g. name, phone number and/or email address) which would be used to provide technical support for your Dell products and services. Dell may use the information for providing recommendations to improve your IT infrastructure.
54 System Time and Date System time and date settings and the network time protocol (NTP) are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. You can set system times and dates and maintained through the NTP. They are also set through the Dell EMC Networking Operating System (OS) command line interfaces (CLIs) and hardware settings. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports reaching an NTP server through different VRFs. You can configure a maximum of eight logging servers across different VRFs or the same VRF.
Protocol Overview The NTP messages to one or more servers and processes the replies as received. The server interchanges addresses and ports, fills in or overwrites certain fields in the message, recalculates the checksum, and returns it immediately. Information included in the NTP message allows each client/server peer to determine the timekeeping characteristics of its other peers, including the expected accuracies of their clocks.
To display the system clock state with respect to NTP, use the show ntp status command from EXEC Privilege mode. DellEMC#show ntp status Clock is synchronized, stratum 4, reference is 10.16.151.117, vrf-id is 0 frequency is -44.862 ppm, stability is 0.050 ppm, precision is -18 reference time deeef7ef.85eeaa10 Tue, Jul 10 2018 9:16:31.523 UTC clock offset is -0.167449 msec, root delay is 149.194 msec root dispersion is 54.557 msec, peer dispersion is 0.
• • • • • • • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the stack/slot/port[/subport] information. For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information. For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the stack/slot/port information. For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
5. Configure the switch as NTP master. CONFIGURATION mode ntp master To configure the switch as NTP Server use the ntp master command. stratum number identifies the NTP Server's hierarchy. The following example shows configuring an NTP server. Dell EMC(conf)#show running-config ntp ! ntp master ntp server 10.16.127.44 ntp server 10.16.127.86 ntp server 10.16.127.
• Receive Timestamp — the arrival time on the client of the last NTP message from the server. If the server becomes unreachable, the value is set to zero. • Transmit Timestamp — the departure time on the server of the current NTP message from the sender. • Filter dispersion — the error in calculating the minimum delay from a set of sample data from a peer. To view the NTP configuration, use the show running-config ntp command in EXEC privilege mode.
Dell EMC Networking OS Time and Date You can set the time and date using the Dell EMC Networking OS CLI. Configuration Task List The following is a configuration task list for configuring the time and date settings.
Set Daylight Saving Time Dell EMC Networking OS supports setting the system to daylight saving time once or on a recurring basis every year. Setting Daylight Saving Time Once Set a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight saving time on a one-time basis. To set the clock for daylight savings time once, use the following command. • Set the clock to the appropriate timezone and daylight saving time.
• • • • • • • • start-year: Enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. start-time: Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm. end-week: If you entered a start-week, enter the one of the following as the week that daylight saving ends: • week-number: Enter a number from 1 to 4 as the number of the week in the month to start daylight saving time.
55 Tunneling Tunnel interfaces create a logical tunnel for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. Tunneling supports RFC 2003, RFC 2473, and 4213. DSCP, hop-limits, flow label values, open shortest path first (OSPF) v2, and OSPFv3 are supported. Internet control message protocol (ICMP) error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported.
tunnel mode ipv6ip no shutdown The following sample configuration shows a tunnel configured in IPIP mode (IPv4 tunnel carries IPv4 and IPv6 traffic): DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 3 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel source 5::5 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel destination 8::9 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel mode ipv6 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#ip address 3.1.1.1/24 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#ipv6 address 3::1/64 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-tu-3)#show config ! interface Tunnel 3 ip address 3.1.1.
interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 ip address 20.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 20:1::1/64 no shutdown DellEMC(conf)#interface tunnel 1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#ip unnumbered tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#ipv6 unnumbered tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.
tunnel source anylocal tunnel allow-remote 40.1.1.2 tunnel mode ipip decapsulate-any no shutdown Guidelines for Configuring Multipoint ReceiveOnly Tunnels • • • • • You can configure up to eight remote end-points for a multipoint receive-only tunnel. The maximum number of remote end-points supported for all multipoint receive-only tunnels on the switch depends on the hardware table size to setup termination.
56 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Feature Description A switch provides upstream connectivity for devices, such as servers. If a switch loses its upstream connectivity, downstream devices also lose their connectivity. However, the devices do not receive a direct indication that upstream connectivity is lost because connectivity to the switch is still operational. UFD allows a switch to associate downstream interfaces with upstream interfaces.
Figure 133. Uplink Failure Detection How Uplink Failure Detection Works UFD creates an association between upstream and downstream interfaces. The association of uplink and downlink interfaces is called an uplink-state group. An interface in an uplink-state group can be a physical interface or a port-channel (LAG) aggregation of physical interfaces. An enabled uplink-state group tracks the state of all assigned upstream interfaces.
Figure 134. Uplink Failure Detection Example If only one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, a specified number of downstream ports associated with the upstream interface are put into a Link-Down state. You can configure this number and is calculated by the ratio of the upstream port bandwidth to the downstream port bandwidth in the same uplink-state group.
• If you disable an uplink-state group, the downstream interfaces are not disabled regardless of the state of the upstream interfaces. • • If an uplink-state group has no upstream interfaces assigned, you cannot disable downstream interfaces when an upstream link goes down. To enable the debug messages for events related to a specified uplink-state group or all groups, use the debug uplink-stategroup [group-id] command, where the group-id is from 1 to 16.
description text The maximum length is 80 alphanumeric characters. 6. (Optional) Disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group. UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode no enable The default is upstream-link tracking is automatically enabled in an uplink-state group. To re-enable upstream-link tracking, use the enable command. Clearing a UFD-Disabled Interface You can manually bring up a downstream interface in an uplink-state group that UFD disabled and is in a UFD-Disabled Error state.
02:38:53: 02:38:53: 02:38:53: 02:38:53: %RPM0-P:CP %RPM0-P:CP %RPM0-P:CP %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Changed Changed Changed Changed interface interface interface interface state state state state to to to to up: up: up: up: Fo Fo Fo Fo 3/4/1 3/5/1 3/6/1 3/7/1 Displaying Uplink Failure Detection To display information on the UFD feature, use any of the following commands.
Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Time since last interface status change: 00:01:23 The following example shows viewing the UFD configuration.
Upstream Interfaces : Te 1/3/1(Up) Te 1/4/1(Dwn) Downstream Interfaces : Te 1/1/1(Dis) Te 1/2/1(Dwn) Te 1/5/1(Dwn) Te 1/9/1(Dwn) Te 1/11/1(Dwn) Te 1/12/1(Dwn) Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) 883
57 Upgrade Procedures To find the upgrade procedures, go to the Dell EMC Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell EMC Networking OS version. To upgrade your system type, follow the procedures in the Dell EMC Networking OS Release Notes. You can download the release notes of your platform at https://www.force10networks.com. Use your login ID to log in to the website.
58 Virtual LANs (VLANs) Virtual LANs (VLANs) are a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a local area network (LAN) in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group. When in Layer 2 mode, VLANs move traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices. The system supports up to 4093 port-based VLANs and one default VLAN, as specified in IEEE 802.1Q.
• • Untagged interfaces must be part of a VLAN. To remove an untagged interface from the Default VLAN, create another VLAN and place the interface into that VLAN. Alternatively, use the no switchport command, and Dell EMC Networking OS removes the interface from the Default VLAN. A tagged interface requires an additional step to remove it from Layer 2 mode. Because tagged interfaces can belong to multiple VLANs, remove the tagged interface from all VLANs using the no tagged interface command.
Information contained in the tag header allows the system to prioritize traffic and to forward information to ports associated with a specific VLAN ID. Tagged interfaces can belong to multiple VLANs, while untagged interfaces can belong only to one VLAN. Configuration Task List This section contains the following VLAN configuration tasks.
To tag frames leaving an interface in Layer 2 mode, assign that interface to a port-based VLAN to tag it with that VLAN ID. To tag interfaces, use the following commands. 1. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode of the VLAN to which you want to assign the interface. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 2. Enable an interface to include the IEEE 802.1Q tag header.
untagged interface This command is available only in VLAN interfaces. The no untagged interface command removes the untagged interface from a port-based VLAN and places the interface in the Default VLAN. You cannot use the no untagged interface command in the Default VLAN. The following example shows the steps and commands to move an untagged interface from the Default VLAN to another VLAN. To determine interface status, use the show vlan command.
Configuring Native VLANs Traditionally, ports can be either untagged for membership to one VLAN or tagged for membership to multiple VLANs. You must connect an untagged port to a VLAN-unaware station (one that does not understand VLAN tags), and you must connect a tagged port to a VLAN-aware station (one that generates and understands VLAN tags). Native VLAN support breaks this barrier so that you can connect a port to both VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware stations. Such ports are referred to as hybrid ports.
59 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Overview In a traditional switched topology as shown below, spanning tree protocols (STPs) are used to block one or more links to prevent loops in the network. Although loops are prevented, bandwidth of all links is not effectively utilized by the connected devices. Figure 136. Traditional switched topology VLT not only overcomes this caveat, but also provides a multipath to the connected devices.
To prevent the initial loop that may occur prior to VLT being established, use a spanning tree protocol. After VLT is established, you may use rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) to prevent loops from forming with new links that are incorrectly connected and outside the VLT domain. VLT provides Layer 2 multipathing, creating redundancy through increased bandwidth, enabling multiple parallel paths between nodes, and load-balancing traffic where alternate paths exist.
between the two VLT chassis. IGMP and VLT configurations must be identical on both sides of the trunk to ensure the same behavior on both sides. The following example shows how VLT is deployed. The switches appear as a single virtual switch from the point of view of the switch or server supporting link aggregation control protocol (LACP). VLT Terminology The following are key VLT terms. • • • • • • Virtual link trunk (VLT) — The combined port channel between an attached device and the VLT peer switches.
If Host 1 from a VLT domain sends a frame to Host 2 in another VLT domain, the frame can use any link shown to reach Host 2. MAC synchronization between VLT peers handles the traffic flow even if it is hashed and forwarded through the other member of the portchannel.
VLT on Core Switches Uplinks from servers to the access layer and from access layer to the aggregation layer are bundled in LAG groups with end-to-end Layer 2 multipathing. This set up requires “horizontal” stacking at the access layer and VLT at the aggregation layer such that all the uplinks from servers to access and access to aggregation are in Active-Active Load Sharing mode. This example provides the highest form of resiliency, scaling, and load balancing in data center switching networks.
Figure 141. Enhanced VLT Configure Virtual Link Trunking VLT requires that you enable the feature and then configure the same VLT domain, backup link, and VLT interconnect on both peer switches. Important Points to Remember • • • • • • • • • • • • • You cannot enable stacking simultaneously with VLT. If you enable both at the same time, unexpected behavior can occur. VLT port channel interfaces must be switch ports. If you include RSTP on the system, configure it before VLT.
• • • • • • • • When you enable IGMP snooping on the VLT peers, ensure the value of the delay-restore command is not less than the query interval. When you enable Layer 3 routing protocols on VLT peers, make sure the delay-restore timer is set to a value that allows sufficient time for all routes to establish adjacency and exchange all the L3 routes between the VLT peers before you enable the VLT ports.
• • One device in the VLT domain is assigned a primary role; the other device takes the secondary role. The primary and secondary roles are required for scenarios when connectivity between the chassis is lost. VLT assigns the primary chassis role according to the lowest MAC address. You can configure the primary role manually. • In a VLT domain, the peer switches must run the same Dell EMC Networking OS software version.
• • • • • • • To connect servers and access switches with VLT peer switches, you use a VLT port channel, as shown in Overview. Up to 96 port-channels are supported; up to 32 member links are supported in each port channel between the VLT domain and an access device. The discovery protocol running between VLT peers automatically generates the ID number of the port channel that connects an access device and a VLT switch.
• • To verify that a VLT peer is consistently configured for either the master or backup role in all VRRP groups, use the show vrrp command on each peer. • Configure the same L3 routing (static and dynamic) on each peer so that the L3 reachability and routing tables are identical on both VLT peers. Both the VRRP master and backup peers must be able to locally forward L3 traffic in the same way.
VLT Bandwidth Monitoring When bandwidth usage of the VLTi (ICL) exceeds 80%, a syslog error message (shown in the following message) and an SNMP trap are generated. %STKUNIT0-M:CP %VLTMGR-6-VLT-LAG-ICL: Overall Bandwidth utilization of VLT-ICL-LAG (portchannel 25) crosses threshold. Bandwidth usage (80 ) When the bandwidth usage drops below the 80% threshold, the system generates another syslog message (shown in the following message) and an SNMP trap.
PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT The designated router functionality of the PIM Sparse-Mode multicast protocol is supported on VLT peer switches for multicast sources and receivers that are connected to VLT ports. VLT peer switches can act as a last-hop router for IGMP receivers and as a first-hop router for multicast sources. Figure 142.
Each VLT peer runs its own PIM protocol independently of other VLT peers. To ensure the PIM protocol states or multicast routing information base (MRIB) on the VLT peers are synced, if the incoming interface (IIF) and outgoing interface (OIF) are Spanned, the multicast route table is synced between the VLT peers. To verify the PIM neighbors on the VLT VLAN and on the multicast port, use the show ip pim neighbor, show ip igmp snooping mrouter, and show running config commands.
Figure 143. Packets without peer routing enabled If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as a proxy gateway for its connected VLT peer as shown in the image below. Even though the gateway address of the packet is different, Peer-1 routes the packet to its destination on behalf of Peer-2 to avoid sub-optimal routing. Figure 144. Packets with peer routing enabled Benefits of Peer Routing • • • • Avoids sub-optimal routing Reduces latency by avoiding another hop in the traffic path.
VLT Unicast Routing VLT unicast routing is a type of VLT peer routing that locally routes unicast packets destined for the L3 endpoint of the VLT peer. This method avoids sub-optimal routing. Peer-routing syncs the MAC addresses of both VLT peers and requires two local DA entries in TCAM. If a VLT node is down, a timer that allows you to configure the amount of time needed for peer recovery provides resiliency. You can enable VLT unicast across multiple configurations using VLT links.
• • When using factory default settings on a new switch deployed as a VLT node, packet loss may occur due to the requirement that all ports must be open. ECMP is not compatible on VLT nodes using VLT multicast. You must use a single VLAN. Configuring VLT Multicast To enable and configure VLT multicast, follow these steps. 1. Enable VLT on a switch, then configure a VLT domain and enter VLT-domain configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id 2. Enable peer-routing.
1. Configure RSTP in the core network and on each peer switch as described in Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). Disabling RSTP on one VLT peer may result in a VLT domain failure. 2. Enable RSTP on each peer switch. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode no disable 3. Configure each peer switch with a unique bridge priority.
1. Configure the VLT interconnect for the VLT domain. The primary and secondary switch roles in the VLT domain are automatically assigned after you configure both sides of the VLTi. NOTE: If you use a third-party ToR unit, to avoid potential problems if you reboot the VLT peers, Dell EMC recommends using static LAGs on the VLTi between VLT peers. 2. Enable VLT and create a VLT domain ID. VLT automatically selects a system MAC address. 3. Configure a backup link for the VLT domain. 4.
NOTE: If management VRF or any specific VRF is enabled on the system, then use the back-up destination command with vrf [management vrf-name | vrf-name] You can optionally specify the time interval used to send hello messages. The range is from 1 to 5 seconds. 3. Configure the port channel to be used as the VLT interconnect between VLT peers in the domain. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 4. Enable peer routing.
vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs from 1 to 1000. 2. Enter an amount of time, in seconds, to delay the restoration of the VLT ports after the system is rebooted. CONFIGURATION mode delay-restore delay-restore-time The range is from 1 to 1200. The default is 90 seconds. Reconfiguring the Default VLT Settings (Optional) To reconfigure the default VLT settings, use the following commands. 1. Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain.
switchport 4. Add one or more port interfaces to the port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface interface: specify one of the following interface types: • • • • • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the stack/slot/port/subport information. For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information.
• • For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information. For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the stack/slot/port information. 3. Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 4. Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 5.
INTERFACE mode port-channel number mode [active] 15. Ensure that the interface is active. MANAGEMENT INTERFACE mode no shutdown 16. Enable peer routing. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-routing If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as the proxy gateway for its peer. 17. Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the VLT peer node in Domain 1. 18. Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the first VLT node in Domain 2. 19. Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the VLT peer node in Domain 2.
show interfaces interface In the following sample VLT configuration steps, VLT peer 1 is Dell-2, VLT peer 2 is Dell-4, and the ToR is S60-1. NOTE: If you use a third-party ToR unit, Dell EMC Networking recommends using static LAGs with VLT peers to avoid potential problems if you reboot the VLT peers. Configure the VLT domain with the same ID in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2.
s60-1#show running-config interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/3/1 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3/1 no ip address ! port-channel-protocol LACP port-channel 100 mode active no shutdown s60-1#show running-config interface port-channel 100 ! interface Port-channel 100 no ip address switchport no shutdown s60-1#show interfaces port-channel 100 brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel L LAG 100 Mode L2 Status up Uptime 03:33:48 Ports Te 1/1/8/1 (Up) Te 1/1/3/1 (Up) Verify VLT is up.
Run PVST+ on both VLT peer switches. A PVST+ instance is created for every VLAN configured in the system. PVST+ instances running in the Primary Peer control the VLT-LAGs on both Primary and Secondary peers. Only the Primary VLT switch determines the PVST+ roles and states on VLT ports and ensures that the VLT interconnect link is never blocked. The PVST+ instance in Primary peer sends the role/state of VLT-LAGs for all VLANs to the Secondary peer.
• • As the Router ID of Dell-1 is the highest in the topology (highest loopback address of 172.17.1.1), Dell-1 is the OSPF Designated Router. As the Router ID of Dell-2 is the second highest in the topology (172.16.1.1), Dell-2 is the OSPF Backup Designated Router. Figure 145. Peer Routing Configuration Example Dell-1 Switch Configuration In the following output, RSTP is enabled with a bridge priority of 0. This ensures that Dell-1 becomes the root bridge.
ip address 10.10.10.1/24 no shutdown (The management interfaces are part of a default VRF and are isolated from the switch’s data plane.) In Dell-1, te 0/0 and te 0/1 are used for VLTi.
vlt-peer-lag port-channel 2 no shutdown Vlan 20 is used in Dell-1, Dell-2, and R1 to form OSPF adjacency. When OSPF is converged, the routing tables in all devices are synchronized. DellEMC#1#sh run int vlan 20 interface Vlan 20 description OSPF PEERING VLAN ip address 192.168.20.1/29 untagged Port-channel 1 no shutdown ! DellEMC#1#sh run int vlan 800 interface Vlan 800 description Client-VLAN ip address 192.168.8.
Use the show vlt detail command to verify that VLT is functional and that the correct VLANs are allowed. DellEMC#1#sh vlt detail Local LAG Id -----------1 2 Peer LAG Id ----------1 2 Local Status -----------UP UP Peer Status ----------UP UP Active VLANs ------------20 1, 800, 900 The following output displays the OSPF configuration in Dell-1 DellEMC#1#sh run | find router router ospf 1 router-id 172.17.1.1 network 192.168.9.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.8.0/24 area 0 network 172.17.1.
0 0 90:b1:1c:f4:2c:bd 90:b1:1c:f4:29:f3 LOCAL_DA LOCAL_DA 00001 00001A The above output shows that the 90:b1:1c:f4:2c:bd MAC address belongs to Dell-1. The 90:b1:1c:f4:29:f3 MAC address belongs to Dell-2. Also note that these MAC addresses are marked with LOCAL_DA. This means, these are the local destination MAC addresses used by hosts when routing is required. Packets sent to this MAC address are directly forwarded to their destinations without being sent to the peer switch.
no ip address port-channel-protocol LACP port-channel 2 mode active no shutdown Te 0/6 connects to the uplink switch R1. Dell-2#sh run int te0/6 interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/6 description To_CR1_fa0/13 no ip address port-channel-protocol LACP port-channel 1 mode active no shutdown Port channel 1 connects the uplink switch R1.
Verify if VLT on Dell-1 is functional Dell-2#sh vlt brief VLT Domain Brief -----------------Domain ID: Role: Role Priority: 1 Secondary 55000 ICL Link Status: HeartBeat Status: VLT Peer Status: Local Unit Id: Version: Local System MAC address: Remote System MAC address: Configured System MAC address: Remote system version: Delay-Restore timer: Peer routing : Peer routing-Timeout timer: Multicast peer routing timeout: Up Up Up 1 6(3) 90:b1:1c:f4:29:f1 90:b1:1c:f4:2c:bb 90:b1:1c:f4:01:01 6(3) 90 seconds En
The following output displays the routes learned using OSPF. Dell-2 also learns the routes to the loopback addresses on R1 through OSPF. Dell-2#show ip route ospf Destination Gateway ----------------O 2.2.2.2/24 via 192.168.20.3, O 3.3.3.2/24 via 192.168.20.3, O 4.4.4.2/24 via 192.168.20.3, O 172.15.1.1/32 via 192.168.20.3, O 172.16.1.2/32 via 192.168.20.
network 172.15.1.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 192.168.20.0 0.0.0.7 area 0 CR1#show ip ospf neighbor (R1 is a DROTHER) Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface 172.16.1.2 1 FULL/BDR 00:00:31 192.168.20.2 Port-channel1 172.17.1.1 1 FULL/DR 00:00:38 192.168.20.1 Port-channel1 CR1#show ip route (Output Truncated) 2.0.0.0/24 is subnetted, 1 subnets C 2.2.2.0 is directly connected, Loopback2 3.0.0.0/24 is subnetted, 1 subnets C 3.3.3.0 is directly connected, Loopback3 O 192.168.8.0/24 [110/2] via 192.168.
Figure 146. eVLT Configuration Example eVLT Configuration Step Examples In Domain 1, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 1. Domain_1_Peer1#configure Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#interface port-channel 1 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-1)# channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/8/1-1/1/8/2 Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#vlt domain 1000 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-link port-channel 1 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-vlt-domain)# back-up destination 10.16.130.
Configure eVLT on Peer 2. Domain_1_Peer2(conf)#interface port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# switchport Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# vlt-peer-lag port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 2.
PIM-Sparse Mode Configuration Example The following sample configuration shows how to configure the PIM Sparse mode designated router functionality on the VLT domain with two VLT port-channels that are members of VLAN 4001. For more information, refer to PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT. Examples of Configuring PIM-Sparse Mode The following example shows how to enable PIM multicast routing on the VLT node globally.
• Display the current configuration of all VLT domains or a specified group on the switch. • EXEC mode show running-config vlt Display statistics on VLT operation. • • EXEC mode show vlt statistics Display the RSTP configuration on a VLT peer switch, including the status of port channels used in the VLT interconnect trunk and to connect to access devices. EXEC mode show spanning-tree rstp Display the current status of a port or port-channel interface used in the VLT domain.
Delay-Restore Abort Threshold Peer-Routing Peer-Routing-Timeout timer Multicast peer-routing timeout DellEMC# : : : : 60 seconds Disabled 0 seconds 150 seconds The following example shows the show vlt detail command.
VLT Statistics ---------------HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: ICL Hello's Sent: ICL Hello's Received: 994 978 89 89 The following example shows the show spanning-tree rstp command. The bold section displays the RSTP state of port channels in the VLT domain. Port channel 100 is used in the VLT interconnect trunk (VLTi) to connect to VLT peer2. Port channels 110, 111, and 120 are used to connect to access switches or servers (vlt).
Configure the backup link. Dell_VLTpeer1(conf)#interface ManagementEthernet 1/1 Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-ma-1/1)#ip address 10.11.206.23/ Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-ma-1/1)#no shutdown Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-ma-1/1)#exit Configure the VLT interconnect (VLTi).
Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-po-110)#vlt-peer-lag port-channel 110 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-po-110)#end Verify that the port channels used in the VLT domain are assigned to the same VLAN.
Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take Spanning tree mismatch at port level A syslog error message is generated. A one-time informational syslog message is generated. Correct the spanning tree configuration on the ports. System MAC mismatch A syslog error message and an SNMP trap are generated. A syslog error message and an SNMP trap are generated.
peer-down-vlan vlan interface number command and the switchport command. After you specify the VLTi link and VLT LAGs, you can associate the same port channel or LAG bundle that is a part of a VLT to a PVLAN by using the interface interface and switchport mode private-vlan commands. When a VLTi port in trunk mode is a member of symmetric VLT PVLANs, the PVLAN packets are forwarded only if the PVLAN settings of both the VLT nodes are identical.
PVLAN Operations When a VLT Peer is Restarted When the VLT peer node is rebooted, the VLAN membership of the VLTi link is preserved and when the peer node comes back online, a verification is performed with the newly received PVLAN configuration from the peer. If any differences are identified, the VLTi link is either added or removed from the VLAN. When the peer node restarts and returns online, all the PVLAN configurations are exchanged across the peers.
VLT LAG Mode PVLAN Mode of VLT VLAN ICL VLAN Membership Mac Synchronization Peer1 Peer2 Peer1 Peer2 Access Access Secondary (Community) Secondary (Isolated) No No • • Yes Yes Promiscuous Promiscuous Primary X Primary X Primary Primary Yes Yes - Secondary (Community) - Secondary (Community) Yes Yes - Secondary (Isolated) - Secondary (Isolated) Yes Yes Promiscuous Trunk Primary Normal No No Promiscuous Trunk Primary Primary Yes No Access Access Secondary (Communi
2. Remove an IP address from the interface. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no ip address 3. Add one or more port interfaces to the port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface interface: specify one of the following interface types: • • • • • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the stack/slot/port/subport information. For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information.
7. To obtain maximum VLT resiliency, configure the PVLAN IDs and mappings to be identical on both the VLT peer nodes. Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to primary. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode primary 8. Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list The list of secondary VLANs can be: • • • Specified in comma-delimited (VLAN-ID,VLAN-ID) or hyphenated-range format (VLAN-ID-VLAN-ID).
When a VLT node detects peer up, it does not perform proxy ARP for the peer IP addresses. IP address synchronization occurs again between the VLT peers. Proxy ARP is enabled only if you enable peer routing on both the VLT peers. If you disable peer routing by using the no peerroutingcommand in VLT DOMAIN node, a notification is sent to the VLT peer to disable the proxy ARP.
4. Verify the VLAN-stack configurations. EXEC Privilege show running-config Sample configuration of VLAN-stack over VLT (Peer 1) Configure the VLT domain DellEMC(conf)#vlt domain 1 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#peer-link port-channel 1 DellEMC(conf-vlt-domain)#back-up destination 10.16.151.
interface Vlan 50 vlan-stack compatible member Port-channel 10,20 shutdown DellEMC# Verify that the Port Channels used in the VLT Domain are Assigned to the VLAN-Stack VLAN DellEMC#show vlan id 50 Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs, R - Remote Port Mirroring VLANs, P - Primary, C Community, I - Isolated O - Openflow Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged o - OpenFlow untagged, O - OpenFlow tagged G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack i - Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - V
switchport vlan-stack trunk vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 no shutdown DellEMC# Configure the VLAN as a VLAN-Stack VLAN and add the VLT LAG as members to the VLAN DellEMC(conf)#interface vlan 50 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50)#vlan-stack compatible DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 10 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 20 DellEMC(conf-if-vl-50-stack)# DellEMC#show running-config interface vlan 50 ! interface Vlan 50 vlan-stack compatible member Port-channel 10,20 shutdown DellEMC# Verify t
IPv6 Peer Routing When you enable peer routing on VLT nodes, the MAC address of the peer VLT node is stored in the ternary content addressable memory (TCAM) space table of a station. If the data traffic destined to a VLT node, node1, reaches the other VLT node, node2, owing to LAGlevel hashing in the ToR switch, it is routed instead of forwarding the packet to node1. This processing occurs because of the match or hit for the entry in the TCAM of the VLT node2.
Figure 147. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Consider a sample scenario as shown in the following figure in which two VLT nodes, Unit1 and Unit2, are connected in a VLT domain using an ICL or VLTi link. To the south of the VLT domain, Unit1 and Unit2 are connected to a ToR switch named Node B. Also, Unit1 is connected to another node, Node A, and Unit2 is linked to a node, Node C.
Neighbor Solicitation from VLT Hosts Consider a case in which NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node1 on the VLT interface and NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node2 due to LAG level hashing in the ToR. When VLT node1 receives NS from VLT VLAN interface, it unicasts the NA packet on the VLT interface. When NS reaches VLT node2, it is flooded on all interfaces including ICL. When VLT node 1 receives NS on ICL, it floods the NA packet on the VLAN.
When VLT node receives traffic from non-VLT host intended to VLT host, it routes the traffic to VLT interface. If VLT interface is not operationally up VLT node will route the traffic over ICL. Non-VLT host to North Bound traffic flow When VLT node receives traffic from non-VLT host intended to north bound with DMAC as self MAC it routes traffic to next hop.
ToR 1. Enable BFD globally. TOR(conf)# bfd enable 2. Configure a VLT peer LAG. TOR(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#no ip address TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#port-channel-protocol lacp TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#port-channel 10 mode active TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#no shutdown TOR(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/2 TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/2)#no ip address TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/2)#port-channel-protocol lacp TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/2)#port-channel 10 mode active TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/2)#no shutdown 3.
VLT Primary 1. Enable BFD globally. VLT_Primary(conf)# bfd enable 2. Configure port channel which is used as VLTi link. VLT_Primary(conf)# interface VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# port-channel 100 no ip address channel-member tengigabitethernet 1/1/1, 1/1/2 no shutdown 3. Enable VLT and configure a VLT domain.
4. Configure a VLT peer LAG. VLT_Primary(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/3 VLT_Primary(conf-if-te-1/1/3)#no ip address VLT_Primary(conf-if-te-1/1/3)#port-channel-protocol lacp VLT_Primary(conf-if-te-1/1/3)#port-channel 10 mode active VLT_Primary(conf-if-te-1/1/3)#no shutdown VLT_Primary(conf)#interface port-channel 10 VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#no ip address VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#switchport VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#vlt-peer-lag port-channel 10 VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#no shutdown 5.
Remote System MAC address: Remote system version: Delay-Restore timer: Delay-Restore Abort Threshold: Peer-Routing : Peer-Routing-Timeout timer: Multicast peer-routing timeout: f4:8e:38:6a:97:3f 6(9) 90 seconds 60 seconds Enabled 0 seconds 150 seconds VXLAN on VLT VLT peers are two nodes in the network that are loosely coupled. It provides high availability to the other ends.
Static VXLAN Configuration in a VLT setup Configuration steps are covered below: 1. Both Gateway VTEPs need VLT configured. • ICL port configuration interface Port-channel 1 no ip address channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/4-5 no shutdown • VLT Domain Configuration vlt domain 100 peer-link port-channel 1 back-up destination 10.11.70.14 • this is ip address of the peer node VXLAN Instance Configuration vxlan-instance 1 static local-vtep-ip 14.14.14.
60 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Command Line Reference Guide.
Figure 149. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway Guidelines for Enabling the VLT Proxy Gateway Keep the following points in mind when you enable a VLT proxy gateway: • • • • • • • • • • • • • Proxy gateway is supported only for VLT; for example, across a VLT domain. You must enable the VLT peer-routing command for the VLT proxy gateway to function.
• • • • When a Virtual Machine (VM) moves from one VLT domain to the another VLT domain, the VM host sends the gratuitous ARP (GARP) , which in-turn triggers a mac movement from the previous VLT domain to the newer VLT domain. After a station move, if the host sends a TTL1 packet destined to its gateway; for example, a previous VLT node, the packet can be dropped.
• LLDP packets fail to reach the remote VLT domain devices (for example, because the system is down, rebooting, or the port’s physical link connection is down). LLDP VLT Proxy Gateway in a Square VLT Topology Figure 150. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway • The preceding figure shows a sample square VLT Proxy gateway topology. There are no diagonal links in the square VLT connection between the C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in the VLT domain 2. This causes sub-optimal routing.
• You can disable the VLT Proxy Gateway for a particular VLAN using an "Exclude-VLAN" configuration. The configuration has to be done in both the VLT domains [C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in VLT domain 2].
Figure 151. VLT Proxy Gateway Sample Topology VLT Domain Configuration Dell-1 and Dell-2 constitute VLT domain 120. Dell-3 and Dell-4 constitute VLT domain 110. These two VLT domains are connected using a VLT LAG P0 50. To know how to configure the interfaces in VLT domains, see the Configuring VLT section. Dell-1 VLT Configuration vlt domain 120 peer-link port-channel 120 back-up destination 10.1.1.
Note that on the inter-domain link, the switchport command is enabled. On a VLTi link between VLT peers in a VLT domain, the switchport command is not used. VLAN 100 is used as the OSPF peering VLAN between Dell-1 and Dell-2. interface Vlan 100 description OSPF Peering VLAN to Dell-2 ip address 10.10.100.1/30 ip ospf network point-to-point no shutdown VLAN 101 is used as the OSPF peering VLAN between the two VLT domains. interface Vlan 101 description ospf peering vlan across VLTPG_Po50 ip address 10.10.
Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.4 1 FULL/ - 00:00:33 10.10.100.1 Vl 100 0 Dell-3 VLT Configuration vlt domain 110 peer-link port-channel 110 back-up destination 10.1.1.1 primary-priority 4096 system-mac mac-address 02:01:e8:d8:93:02 unit-id 0 peer-routing ! proxy-gateway static remote-mac-address 00:01:e8:d8:93:07 remote-mac-address 00:01:e8:d8:93:e5 These MAC addresses are the system L2 interface addresses for each switch at the remote site, Dell-1 and Dell-2.
Dell-4 VLT Configuration vlt domain 110 peer-link port-channel 110 back-up destination 10.1.1.0 primary-priority 24576 system-mac mac-address 02:01:e8:d8:93:02 unit-id 1 peer-routing ! proxy-gateway static remote-mac-address 00:01:e8:d8:93:07 remote-mac-address 00:01:e8:d8:93:e5 These MAC addresses are the system L2 interface addresses for each switch at the remote site, Dell-1 and Dell-2. interface Vlan 102 description ospf peering vlan to DELL-3 ip address 10.10.102.
ToR 1. Enable BFD globally. TOR(conf)# bfd enable 2. Configure a VLT peer LAG. TOR(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#no ip address TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#port-channel-protocol lacp TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#port-channel 10 mode active TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/1)#no shutdown TOR(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/2 TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/2)#no ip address TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/2)#port-channel-protocol lacp TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/2)#port-channel 10 mode active TOR(conf-if-te-1/1/2)#no shutdown 3.
VLT Primary 1. Enable BFD globally. VLT_Primary(conf)# bfd enable 2. Configure port channel which is used as VLTi link. VLT_Primary(conf)# interface VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-100)# port-channel 100 no ip address channel-member tengigabitethernet 1/1/1, 1/1/2 no shutdown 3. Enable VLT and configure a VLT domain.
4. Configure a VLT peer LAG. VLT_Primary(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/3 VLT_Primary(conf-if-te-1/1/3)#no ip address VLT_Primary(conf-if-te-1/1/3)#port-channel-protocol lacp VLT_Primary(conf-if-te-1/1/3)#port-channel 10 mode active VLT_Primary(conf-if-te-1/1/3)#no shutdown VLT_Primary(conf)#interface port-channel 10 VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#no ip address VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#switchport VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#vlt-peer-lag port-channel 10 VLT_Primary(conf-if-po-10)#no shutdown 5.
Remote System MAC address: Remote system version: Delay-Restore timer: Delay-Restore Abort Threshold: Peer-Routing : Peer-Routing-Timeout timer: Multicast peer-routing timeout: f4:8e:38:6a:97:3f 6(9) 90 seconds 60 seconds Enabled 0 seconds 150 seconds VLT Proxy Gateway 965
61 Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Overview The switch acts as the VXLAN gateway and performs the VXLAN Tunnel End Point (VTEP) functionality. VXLAN is a technology where in the data traffic from the virtualized servers is transparently transported over an existing legacy network. Figure 152. VXLAN Gateway NOTE: In a stack setup, the Dell EMC Networking OS does not support VXLAN.
• NSX Controller-based VXLAN for VLT Components of VXLAN network VXLAN provides a mechanism to extend an L2 network over an L3 network. In short, VXLAN is an L2 overlay scheme over an L3 network and this overlay is termed as a VXLAN segment.
• • • • VTEP is responsible for identifying and binding a Port and VLAN to a logical network VTEP maintains MAC bindings to a VTEP. VXLAN communicates with the VTEP using a standard protocol called OvsDb Protocol. The protocol uses the JSON RPC-based message format. The VTEP acts according to the TOR schema defined by VMWare. The solution is very specific to VMWare-based orchestration platforms and does not work with other orchestration platforms.
VXLAN Header : • • • Frame Check Sequence (FCS): Note that the original Ethernet frame's FCS is not included, but new FCS is generated on the outer Ethernet frame. VXLAN Flags : Reserved bits set to zero except bit 3, the first bit, which is set to 1 for a valid VNI VNI: The 24-bit field that is the VXLAN Network Identifier Reserved: A set of fields, 24 bits and 8 bits, that are reserved and set to zero .
+cnuaNu7Kq2V0DGSdR7eIkDTHkflttHbMmRfStHLetk3bA0HgXTW5c+vFn79EX/nJqxIvkl5ADT7k5JZR +j6i9eskgUlvBuV5OOZKzh29Gy4sjXvdYL5GirZFon8iZNY5FON +WlpcLJ9GjMvVfwvJx7exVs9cqXvm6UZ4Bf262STKbm+Q4qz30tyjDdF1xDBcBjL83UcEvSW65V/ sSFKBohqu40EWXIBJ0QbKvFWv91rbjkgtsrHVTdohrA== -----END CERTIFICATE----Copy and paste the generated certificate to the NSX.
Figure 155. Hardware Devices 3. Add a service node or replicator. Under Home > Networking and Security > Service Definition > Hardware Devices > Replication Cluster, click the Edit button. Select required hosts for replication and click OK. Figure 156. Add Service Node or Replicator NOTE: Ensure L3 reachability between the VTEP and the replicator. 4. Create Logical Switch. You can create a logical network by creating a logical switch.
Figure 157. Create Logical Switch 5. Create Logical Switch Port. A logical switch port provides a logical connection point for a VM interface (VIF) and a L2 gateway connection to an external network. It binds the virtual access ports in the gateway to logical network (VXLAN) and VLAN. In the Manage Hardware Bindings window, expand a VTEP and click Add. The Manage Hardware Bindings Window opens. Click the Select link and the Specify Hardware Port window opens. Click the hardware port and click OK.
Figure 159. Create Logical Switch Port 6. (Optional) Enable or disable BFD globally. Go to Hardware Devices tab > BFD Configuration, and click the Edit button. The Edit BFD Configuration windows opens. Check or uncheck the Enable BFD check box. You can also change the probe interval if required. Figure 160. Edit VXLAN BFD Configuration NOTE: For more details about NSX controller configuration, refer to the NSX user guide from VMWare .
Configuring and Controling VXLAN from Nuage Controller GUI The Dell EMC Networking OS supports Nuage controller for VXLAN. You can configure and control VXLAN from the Nuage controller GUI, by adding a hardware device to the Nuage controller and authenticating the device. 1. Under the Infrastructure tab, add a datacenter gateway. Figure 161. Add Data center Gateway 2. Create port-to-VLAN mappings. Figure 162. Port-to-VLAN mappings 3. Under the Networks tab, create an L2 domain.
Configuring VxLAN Gateway To configure the VxLAN gateway on the switch, follow these steps: 1. Connecting to NVP controller 2. Advertising VXLAN access ports to controller Connecting to an NVP Controller To connect to an NVP controller, use the following commands. 1. Enable the VXLAN feature. CONFIGURATION mode feature vxlan You must configure feature VXLAN to configure vxlan-instance. 2. Create a VXLAN instance that connects to the controller.
Displaying VXLAN Configurations To display the VXLAN configurations, use the following commands. The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance command. DellEMC#show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 Instance : 1 Mode : Controller Admin State : enabled Controller Type : Nsx Management IP : 10.16.140.34 Gateway IP : 4.3.3.3 MAX Backoff : 8000 Controller : 10.16.140.181:6640 ssl Controller Cluster : : 10.16.140.181:6640 ssl (connected) : 10.16.140.182:6640 ssl (connected) : 10.16.140.
The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance unicast-mac-remote command. DellEMC# show vxlan vxlan-instance <1> unicast-mac-remote Total Local Mac Count: 1 VNI MAC TUNNEL 4656 00:00:01:00:00:01 36.1.1.1 The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance unicast-mac-remote command when the tunnel is down. DellEMC# show vxlan vxlan-instance <1> unicast-mac-remote Total Local Mac Count: 1 VNI MAC TUNNEL 4656 00:00:01:00:00:01 36.1.1.
1. Enable VXLAN configuration globally on the platform. CONFIGURATION mode feature vxlan 2. Enable static VXLAN instance. CONFIGURATION mode INTERFACE mode vxlan-instance instance ID [static] You can configure vxlan-instance on INTERFACE mode to enable VXLAN on specific ports. 3. Set the local IP Address that can be used as a source for VXLAN tunnels. VXLAN-INSTANCE mode local-vtep-ip IP Address 4. Create a VNI profile to associate with remote VTEP configuration.
The following example displays VXLAN statistics for a specific port and VLAN combination. DellEMC# show vxlan statistics interface te 0/0 vlan 2 Statistics for Port : Te 0/0 Vlan : 2 Rx Packets : 0 Rx Bytes : 0 Tx Packets : 0 Tx Bytes : 0 The following example displays VXLAN statistics for the specified VXLAN tunnel. DellEMC# show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 statistics remote-vtep-ip 1.1.1.1 Statistics for Remote-vtep-ip : 1.1.1.
VXLAN Scenario VXLAN tunnel stays down even if the remote VTEP IP is reachable through a recursive route. Following section explains the scenario through an example configuration. The following illustration depicts the topology in which the VTEPs are connected. Figure 164. VXLAN Scenario In the above illustration, R1 and R2 are the VTEPs that are trying to form the VXLAN tunnel. R3, the route reflector, exchanges the routes across two IBGP peers (R1 and R2).
In this RIOT scheme, whenever R1 tries to reach R2, the packet gets to P1 on VTEP 1 with VLAN 10 and gets routed out of P2 on VLAN 20. VTEP 1 sends an ARP request for R2 (10.1.2.1) through P2. This request gets VXLAN encapsulated at P3 and is sent out of P4. Eventually, the native ARP request reaches R2. R2 sends an ARP response that is VXLAN encapsulated at VTEP 2. This response reaches VTEP 1 on P4 with a VXLAN encapsulation. At this point, the ARP response is de-capsulated at P4.
• • • • • • • When you ping for 10.1.2.1 (Vlan 20’s IP on R2) from R1, the packet would get to P1 on VTEP 1 with Vlan 10, and try to get routed out of P2 on Vlan 20. VTEP 1 sends an ARP request for 10.1.2.1 out of P2. This gets VXLAN encapsulated at P2, and gets sent out of P3. VXLAN encapsulated ARP request lands on VTEP 2 which is decapsulated and sent out of P5 and P6. Packets looped back to P5 will not be forwarded again to either to P4 or P6 because of the added ACL rule 4.4.3.
In order for this configuration to work, the physical loopback ports are required to be in port-channels. There are two types of physical loopback interfaces: VXLAN Loopback Port and Non-VXLAN Loopback Port. These two port-channels are implicitly made no spanning tree, so that they do not go into a blocked state if xSTP is enabled. Internal Loopback To configure internal loopback port-channels, add free ports in the device as members of a port-channel, say 10, then configure vxlaninstance 1 loopback.
For VLT, in addition to the masks specified earlier, the VLT specific mask, to disallow frames that ingress on an ICL from going out of a VLT port channel would be permanently in place. These masks won’t be removed for the loopback ports even if the VLT peer LAG goes down (this is a deviation from standard VLT behavior, when these loopbacks are provisioned as VLT port-channels.). NSX Controller-based VXLAN for VLT Apart from static VXLAN for VLT, you can also use an NSX controller for VXLAN in a VLT setup.
• • before configuring controller-based VXLAN with VLT, remove any existing standalone VXLAN configuration. BFD tunnels come up only after the NSX controller sends tunnel details. The details come after the remote MAC addresses are downloaded from NSX controller. Configure NSX Controller-based VxLAN in VLT Setup You can configure NSX controller-based VxLAN in a VLT setup. To configure NSX controller-based VxLAN in a VLT setup, perform the following tasks: 1. (Optional) Configure BFD and UFD.
gateway-ip gateway-IP-address 5. Enter the IP address of the peer OVSDB server. peer-ovsdbserver-ip ovsdb-IP-address The peer OVSDB server is the peer VLT device. 6. Enter the fail mode. VxLAN INSTANCE mode fail-mode secure 7. Enable the VxLAN instance. VxLAN INSTANCE mode no shutdown NOTE: Dell EMC Networking recommends the non-secure fail mode if you are configuring VxLAN for a VLT setup and use a physical L3 link for peer OVSDB connectivity.
unit-id 0 peer-routing Configuration on an interface that is not part of VLT (orphan port): DellEMC#show run interface te 1/21 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21 1122 Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) vxlan-instance 1 no ip address switchport no shutdown DellEMC# Configuration on VLT port channel: DellEMC#show run int po 10 ! interface Port-channel 10 vxlan-instance 1 no ip address switchport vlt-peer-lag port-channel 10 no shutdown The following are some of the show command outputs on the VLT primary: DellEM
* - No VLAN mapping exists and yet to be installed Name VNID a35fe7f7-fe82-37b4-b69a-0af4244d1fca 5000 DellEMC#$nstance 1 logical-network name a35fe7f7-fe82-37b4-b69a-0af4244d1fca Name : a35fe7f7-fe82-37b4-b69a-0af4244d1fca Description : Type : ELAN Tunnel Key : 5000 VFI : 28674 Unknown Multicast MAC Tunnels: 6.6.6.
DellEMC#show cam mac stack-unit 1 port-set 0 VlanId Mac Address Region Interface 500 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff STATIC 00001 28674 00:00:00:cc:00:00 DYNAMIC 0x80000004(vxlan) 28674 00:00:bb:00:00:00 DYNAMIC 0x80000006(vxlan) 0 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff STATIC 00001 1 00:01:e8:8b:7a:6e DYNAMIC Po 11 20 00:00:00:cc:00:00 STATIC Te 1/21 500 f4:8e:38:2b:3e:87 STATIC Po 1 0 00:10:18:ff:ff:ff STATIC Invalid 500 34:17:eb:37:11:02 DYNAMIC Te 1/51/1 0 14:18:77:0a:53:82 LOCAL_DA 00001 0 14:18:77:0a:53:82 LOCAL_DA 00001 0 f4:8e:38:2b:
Tunnel Key : 5000 VFI : 28674 Unknown Multicast MAC Tunnels: 6.6.6.2 : vxlan_over_ipv4 (up)(Active) Port Vlan Bindings: Te 1/21: VLAN: 20 (0x80000004), Po 1: VLAN: 20 (0x80000001), Po 10: VLAN: 20 (0x80000002), Po 20: VLAN: 20 (0x80000005), DellEMC# DellEMC# DellEMC# DellEMC# DellEMC# DellEMC#show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 multicast-mac * - Active Replicator LN-Name VNID a35fe7f7-fe82-37b4-b69a-0af4244d1fca 5000 MAC unknown dst TUNNEL-LIST 6.6.6.
• show file flash://vtep-cert.
Figure 167. Hardware Devices 3. Add a service node or replicator. Under Home > Networking and Security > Service Definition > Hardware Devices > Replication Cluster, click the Edit button. Select required hosts for replication and click OK. Figure 168. Add Service Node or Replicator NOTE: Ensure L3 reachability between the VTEP and the replicator. 4. Create Logical Switch. You can create a logical network by creating a logical switch.
Figure 169. Create Logical Switch 5. Create Logical Switch Port. A logical switch port provides a logical connection point for a VM interface (VIF) and a L2 gateway connection to an external network. It binds the virtual access ports in the gateway to logical network (VXLAN) and VLAN. In the Manage Hardware Bindings window, expand a VTEP and click Add. The Manage Hardware Bindings Window opens. Click the Select link and the Specify Hardware Port window opens. Click the hardware port and click OK.
Figure 171. Create Logical Switch Port 6. (Optional) Enable or disable BFD globally. Go to Hardware Devices tab > BFD Configuration, and click the Edit button. The Edit BFD Configuration windows opens. Check or uncheck the Enable BFD check box. You can also change the probe interval if required. Figure 172. Edit VXLAN BFD Configuration NOTE: For more details about NSX controller configuration, refer to the NSX user guide from VMWare .
62 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) VRF Overview VRF improves functionality by allowing network paths to be segmented without using multiple devices. Using VRF also increases network security and can eliminate the need for encryption and authentication due to traffic segmentation. Internet service providers (ISPs) often take advantage of VRF to create separate virtual private networks (VPNs) for customers; VRF is also referred to as VPN routing and forwarding.
VRF Configuration Notes Although there is no restriction on the number of VLANs that can be assigned to a VRF instance, the total number of routes supported in VRF is limited by the size of the IPv4 CAM. VRF is implemented in a network device by using Forwarding Information Bases (FIBs). A network device may have the ability to configure different virtual routers, where entries in the FIB that belong to one VRF cannot be accessed by another VRF on the same device.
Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF PBR, L3 QoS on VLANs Yes No NOTE: QoS not supported on VLANs. IPv4 ARP Yes Yes sFlow Yes No VRRP on physical and logical interfaces Yes Yes VRRPV3 Yes Yes Secondary IP Addresses Yes Yes Basic Yes Yes OSPFv3 Yes Yes IS-IS Yes Yes BGP Yes Yes ACL Yes No Multicast No No NDP Yes Yes RAD Yes Yes DHCP DHCP requests are not forwarded across VRF instances.
The VRF ID range is from 1 to 511. 0 is the default VRF ID. Assigning an Interface to a VRF You must enter the ip vrf forwarding command before you configure the IP address or any other setting on an interface. NOTE: You can configure an IP address or subnet on a physical or VLAN interface that overlaps the same IP address or subnet configured on another interface only if the interfaces are assigned to different VRFs.
CONFIGURATION router ospf process-id vrf vrf name The process-id range is from 0-65535. Configuring VRRP on a VRF Instance You can configure the VRRP feature on interfaces that belong to a VRF instance. In a virtualized network that consists of multiple VRFs, various overlay networks can exist on a shared physical infrastructure. Nodes (hosts and servers) that are part of the VRFs can be configured with IP static routes for reaching specific destinations through a given gateway in a VRF.
VRF MODE interface management When Management VRF is configured, the following interface range or interface group commands are disabled: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 nd dad — Duplicated Address Detection nd dns-server — Configure DNS distribution option in RA packets originated by the router nd hop-limit — Set hop limit advertised in RA and used in IPv6 data packets originated by the router nd managed-config-flag — Hosts sh
Figure 174.
Figure 175. Setup VRF Interfaces The following example relates to the configuration shown in the above illustrations. Router 1 ip vrf blue 1 ! ip vrf orange 2 ! ip vrf green 3 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 10.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 20.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding green ip address 30.0.0.
ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 1.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/3 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 192 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 2.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/3 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/3 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.1 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.0.0/24 area 0 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.1 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 20.0.0.
! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.2 network 11.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/1 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.2 network 21.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/2/2 ! ip route vrf green30.0.0.0/24 3.0.0.1 ! The following shows the output of the show commands on Router 1.
C C O ----------2.0.0.0/24 20.0.0.0/24 21.0.0.0/24 ------Direct, Vl 192 Direct, Te 1/1/2/1 via 2.0.0.
Configuring Route Leaking without Filtering Criteria You can use the ip route-export tag command to export all the IPv4 routes corresponding to a source VRF. For leaking IPv6 routes, use the ipv6 route-export tag command. This action exposes source VRF's routes (IPv4 or IPv6 depending on the command that you use) to various other VRFs. The destinations or target VRFs then import these IPv4 or IPv6 routes using the ip route-import tag or the ipv6 route-import tag command respectively.
ip route-import 3:3 9. Configure VRF-green. ip vrf vrf-green interface-type slot/port[/subport] ip vrf forwarding VRF-green ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-green is created and the interface is assigned to it. 10. Configure the import target in the source VRF VRF-Shared for reverse communication with VRF-red and VRF-blue.
00:00:11 C O C 122.2.2.0/24 44.4.4.4/32 144.4.4.0/24 Direct, Te 1/1/2/1 0/0 via vrf-shared:144.4.4.4 0/0 Direct, vrf-shared:Te 1/1/4/1 22:39:61 00:32:36 0/0 00:32:36 DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Green O 33.3.3.3/32 00:00:11 via 133.3.3.3 C Direct, Te 1/1/3/1 0/0 133.3.3.0/24 110/0 22:39:61 DellEMC# show ip route vrf VRF-Shared O 11.1.1.1/32 via VRF-Red:111.1.1.1 110/0 00:00:10 C 111.1.1.0/24 Direct, VRF-Red:Te 1/1/1/1 0/0 22:39:59 O 22.2.2.2/32 via VRF-Blue:122.2.2.2 110/0 00:00:11 C 122.2.2.
You can then use the ip route-import route-map command to import routes matching the filtering criteria defined in the import_ospf_protocol route-map. For a reply communication, VRF-blue is configured with a route-export tag. This value is then configured as route-import tag on the VRF-Red. To configure route leaking using filtering criteria, perform the following steps: 1.
O 44.4.4.4/32 via vrf-red:144.4.4.4 0/0 00:32:36 << only OSPF and BGP leaked from VRF-red Important Points to Remember • • • Only Active routes are eligible for leaking. For example, if VRF-A has two routes from BGP and OSPF, in which the BGP route is not active. In this scenario, the OSPF route takes precedence over BGP. Even though the Target VRF-B has specified filtering options to match BGP, the BGP route is not leaked as that route is not active in the Source VRF.
63 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) VRRP Overview VRRP is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP specifies a MASTER router that owns the next hop IP and MAC address for end stations on a local area network (LAN). The MASTER router is chosen from the virtual routers by an election process and forwards packets sent to the next hop IP address.
Figure 176. Basic VRRP Configuration VRRP Benefits With VRRP configured on a network, end-station connectivity to the network is not subject to a single point-of-failure. End-station connections to the network are redundant and are not dependent on internal gateway protocol (IGP) protocols to converge or update routing tables. In conjunction with Virtual Link Trunking (VLT), you can configure optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP).
Table 143. Recommended VRRP Advertise Intervals Total VRRP Groups Recommended Advertise Interval Groups/Interface Less than 250 1 second 12 Between 250 and 450 2–3 seconds 24 Between 450 and 600 3–4 seconds 36 Between 600 and 800 4 seconds 48 Between 800 and 1000 5 seconds 84 Between 1000 and 1200 7 seconds 100 Between 1200 and 1500 8 seconds 120 VRRP Configuration By default, VRRP is not configured.
interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 ip address 10.10.10.1/24 ! vrrp-group 111 no shutdown Configuring the VRRP Version for an IPv4 Group For IPv4, you can configure a VRRP group to use one of the following VRRP versions: • • VRRPv2 as defined in RFC 3768, Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) VRRPv3 as defined in RFC 5798, Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Version 3 for IPv4 and IPv6 You can also migrate a IPv4 group from VRRPv2 to VRRP3.
• The virtual IP addresses must be in the same subnet as the primary or secondary IP addresses configured on the interface. Though a single VRRP group can contain virtual IP addresses belonging to multiple IP subnets configured on the interface, Dell EMC Networking recommends configuring virtual IP addresses belonging to the same IP subnet for any one VRRP group. • • • For example, an interface (on which you enable VRRP) contains a primary IP address of 50.1.1.1/24 and a secondary IP address of 60.1.1.
VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.10.2.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 27, Gratuitous ARP sent: 2 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:6f Virtual IP address: 10.10.2.2 10.10.2.3 Authentication: When the VRRP process completes its initialization, the State field contains either Master or Backup.
NOTE: Authentication for VRRPv3 is not supported. To configure simple authentication, use the following command. • Configure a simple text password. INTERFACE-VRID mode authentication-type simple [encryption-type] password Parameters: • • encryption-type: 0 indicates unencrypted; 7 indicates encrypted. password: plain text. The bold section shows the encryption type (encrypted) and the password.
Changing the Advertisement Interval By default, the MASTER router transmits a VRRP advertisement to all members of the VRRP group every one second, indicating it is operational and is the MASTER router. If the VRRP group misses three consecutive advertisements, the election process begins and the BACKUP virtual router with the highest priority transitions to MASTER.
For a virtual group, you can track the line-protocol state or the routing status of any of the following interfaces with the interface interface parameter: • • • • • • • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the stack/slot/port/subport information. For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the stack/slot/port/subport information.
virtual-address 10.10.10.3 virtual-address 10.10.10.10 The following example shows verifying the tracking status.
Set the delay timer on individual interfaces. The delay timer is supported on all physical interfaces, VLANs, and LAGs. When you configure both CLIs, the later timer rules VRRP enabling. For example, if you set vrrp delay reload 600 and vrrp delay minimum 300, the following behavior occurs: • • When the system reloads, VRRP waits 600 seconds (10 minutes) to bring up VRRP on all interfaces that are up and configured for VRRP.
Figure 177. VRRP for IPv4 Topology Examples of Configuring VRRP for IPv4 and IPv6 The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv4 Router 2. R2(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/3/1 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1)#ip address 10.1.1.1/24 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1)#vrrp-group 99 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1-vrid-99)#priority 200 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1-vrid-99)#virtual 10.1.1.3 R2(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1-vrid-99)#no shut R2(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1)#show conf ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3/1 ip address 10.1.1.
-----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3/1, VRID: 99, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 200, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 817, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:63 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.3 Authentication: (none) R2# Router 3 R3(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/2/1 R3(conf-if-te-1/1/2/1)#ip address 10.1.1.
Figure 178. VRRP for an IPv6 Configuration NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be MASTER even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv6 Router 2 and Router 3. Configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface.
ipv6 address 1::1/64 vrrp-group 10 priority 100 virtual-address fe80::10 virtual-address 1::10 no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#end R2#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1, IPv6 VRID: 10, Version: 3, Net:fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f (local) Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 135 Virtual MAC address: 00:00
instance in order that there is one MASTER and one backup router for each VRF. In VRF-1 and VRF-2, Switch-2 serves as owner-master of the VRRP group and Switch-1 serves as the backup. On VRF-3, Switch-1 is the owner-master and Switch-2 is the backup. In VRF-1 and VRF-2 on Switch-2, the virtual IP and node IP address, subnet, and VRRP group are the same. On Switch-1, the virtual IP address, subnet, and VRRP group are the same in VRF-1 and VRF-2, but the IP address of the node interface is unique.
! S1(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/3/1 S1(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-3 S1(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1)#ip address 20.1.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1)#vrrp-group 15 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 15 in VRF 3 will be 243. S1(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1-vrid-105)#priority 255 S1(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1-vrid-105)#virtual-address 20.1.1.5 S1(conf-if-te-1/1/3/1)#no shutdown DellEMC#show vrrp tengigabitethernet 1/1/8/1 -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/8/1, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.
This VLAN scenario often occurs in a service-provider network in which you configure VLAN tags for traffic from multiple customers on customer-premises equipment (CPE), and separate VRF instances associated with each VLAN are configured on the provider edge (PE) router in the point-of-presence (POP).
10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) VRRP in VRF: Switch-2 VLAN Configuration Switch-2 S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-1 1 ! S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-2 2 ! S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S2(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1 S2(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#no ip address S2(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#switchport S2(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#no shutdown ! S2(conf-if-te-1/1/1/1)#interface vlan 100 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#ip address 10.10.1.
Port-channel 1, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 2 vrf2 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 419, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) VRRP for IPv6 Configuration This section shows VRRP IPv6 topology with CLI configurations.
NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be master even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address.
VRF: 0 default State: Backup, Priority: 100, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 11, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:0a Virtual IP address: 1::10 fe80::10 DellEMC#show vrrp tengigabitethernet 1/1/1/1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1/1, IPv6 VRID: 255, Version: 3, Net: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:fd76 VRF: 0 default State: Backup, Priority: 90, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed H
Port-channel 1, IPv6 VRID: 255, Version: 3, Net: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:fd76 VRF: 2 vrf2 State: Backup, Priority: 90, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 548, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe80::255 Proxy Gateway with VRRP VLT proxy gateway solves the inefficient traffic trombone problem when VLANs are extended between date cen
• • • The core routers C1 and D1 in the local VLT domain are connected to the core routers C2 and D2 in the remote VLT Domain using VLT links. The core routers C1 and D1 in local VLT Domain along with C2 and D2 in the remote VLT Domain are part of a Layer 3 cloud. The core routers C1, D1, C2, D2 are in a VRRP group with the same vrrp-group ID. When a virtual machine running in Server Rack 1 migrates to Server Rack 2, L3 packets for that VM are routed through the default gateway.
unit-id 1 peer-routing interface port-channel 128 channel member ten 1/1/1 channel member ten 1/1/2 no shutdown int ten 1/5/1 port-channel-protocol lacp port-channel 10 mode active no shut int ten 1/4/1 port-channel-protocol lacp port-channel 20 mode active no shut interface port-channel 10 vlt-peer-lag po 10 switchport no shutdown interface port-channel 20 vlt-peer-lag po 20 switchport no shutdown int vlan 100 ip address 100.1.1.
interface port-channel 10 vlt-peer-lag po 10 switchport no shutdown interface port-channel 20 vlt-peer-lag po 20 switchport no shutdown int vlan 100 ip address 100.1.1.3/24 tagged port-channel 10 vrrp-group 10 advertise-interval 60 virtual-ip 100.1.1.254 priority 100 no shutdown int vlan 200 tagged port-channel 20 no shutdown router ospf 10 network 100.1.1.0/24 area 0 Sample configuration of D2: vlt domain 10 peer-link port-channel 128 back-up destination 10.16.140.
int vlan 200 tagged port-channel 20 no shutdown router ospf 10 network 100.1.1.
64 Debugging and Diagnostics Offline Diagnostics The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. The diagnostics tests are grouped into three levels: • • • Level 0 — Level 0 diagnostics check for the presence of various components and perform essential path verifications. In addition, Level 0 diagnostics verify the identification registers of the components on the board. Level 1 — A smaller set of diagnostic tests.
The following example shows the offline stack-unit stack-unit-number command. DellEMC#offline stack-unit 1 Warning - Taking unit offline for running diagnostics will make it operationally down, causing traffic disruption through the unit. Please make sure that stacking/fanout not configured for Diagnostics execution. Also reboot/online command is necessary for normal operation after the offline command is issued.
QSFP 1/2/1 CheckCodeExt = 0xf2 [output truncated] Recognize an Overtemperature Condition An overtemperature condition occurs, for one of two reasons: the card genuinely is too hot or a sensor has malfunctioned. Inspect cards adjacent to the one reporting the condition to discover the cause. • • If directly adjacent cards are not normal temperature, suspect a genuine overheating condition. If directly adjacent cards are normal temperature, suspect a faulty sensor.
Cpu_Int 95 94 NA NA NA -- Temperature Limits (deg C) ------------------------ --------------------------------------------Minor Minor Off Major Major Off Shutdown Opt_Mod1 NA NA NA NA NA -- Temperature Limits (deg C) ------------------------ --------------------------------------------Minor Minor Off Major Major Off Shutdown Opt_Mod2 NA NA NA NA NA -- Temperature Limits (deg C) ------------------------ --------------------------------------------Minor Minor Off Major Major Off Shutdown Opt_Mod3 NA NA
OID String OID Name Description .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.5.1.8 chSysPortXfpTxPower OID displays the transmitting power of the connected optics. chSysPortXfpRecvTemp OID displays the temperature of the connected optics. NOTE: These OIDs only generate if you enable the enable opticinfo-update-interval is enabled command. .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.4 dellNetFpPacketBufferTable View the modular packet buffers details per stack unit and the mode of allocation. .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.
Troubleshooting Packet Loss The show hardware stack-unit command is intended primarily to troubleshoot packet loss. To troubleshoot packet loss, use the following commands.
HOL DROPS on COS5 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS6 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS7 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS8 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS9 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS10 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS11 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS12 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS13 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS14 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS15 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS16 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS17 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS18 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS19 : 0 TxPurge CellErr : 0 Aged Drops : 0 --- Egress MAC counters--Egress FCS Drops : 0 --- Egress FORWARD PROCESSOR Drops --IPv4 L3UC Aged & Drops : 0 TTL Threshold Drops : 0 INV
rxPkt(COS8 ) :773 rxPkt(COS9 ) :0 rxPkt(COS10) :0 rxPkt(COS11) :0 rxPkt(UNIT0) :773 transmitted :12698 txRequested :12698 noTxDesc :0 txError :0 txReqTooLarge :0 txInternalError :0 txDatapathErr :0 txPkt(COS0 ) :0 txPkt(COS1 ) :0 txPkt(COS2 ) :0 txPkt(COS3 ) :0 txPkt(COS4 ) :0 txPkt(COS5 ) :0 txPkt(COS6 ) :0 txPkt(COS7 ) :0 txPkt(COS8 ) :0 txPkt(COS9 ) :0 txPkt(COS10) :0 txPkt(COS11) :0 txPkt(UNIT0) :0 Example of Viewing Party Bus Statistics DellEMC#sh hardware stack-unit 1 cpu party-bus statistics Input St
Example of Displaying Counter Values for all Interface in the Selected Stack-Member and Port-Pipe DellEMC#show hardware stack-unit 1 unit 0 counters unit: 0 port: 1 (interface Hu 1/1/1) Description Value RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX - IPV4 L3 Unicast Frame Counter IPV4 L3 Routed Multicast Packets IPV6 L3 Unicast Frame Counter IPV6 L3 Routed Multicast Packets Unicast Packet Counter 64 Byte Frame Counter 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter
RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - Debug Counter 4 Debug Counter 5 Debug Counter 6 Debug Counter 7 Debug Counter 8 64 Byte Frame Counter 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter 4
Mini Core Dumps Dell EMC Networking OS supports mini core dumps on the application and kernel crashes. Application and kernel mini core dumps are always enabled. The mini core dumps contain the stack space and some other minimal information that you can use to debug a crash. These files are small files and are written into flash until space is exhausted. When the flash is full, the write process is stopped. A mini core dump contains critical information in the event of a crash.
Enabling TCP Dumps A TCP dump captures CPU-bound control plane traffic to improve troubleshooting and system manageability. When you enable TCP dump, it captures all the packets on the local CPU, as specified in the CLI. You can save the traffic capture files to flash, FTP, SCP, or TFTP. The files saved on the flash are located in the flash:// TCP_DUMP_DIR/Tcpdump_/ directory and labeled tcpdump_*.pcap. There can be up to 20 Tcpdump_ directories.
65 Standards Compliance This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell EMC Networking products. NOTE: Unless noted, when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS, the system also supports predecessor standards. One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http://tools.ietf.org/ website. Click “Browse and search IETF documents,” enter an RFC number, and inspect the top of the resulting document for obsolescence citations to related RFCs.
RFC and I-D Compliance Dell EMC Networking OS supports the following standards. The standards are grouped by related protocol. The columns showing support by platform indicate which version of Dell EMC Networking OS first supports the standard. General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols. Table 145.
R F C # Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 24 Definition of 7.7.1 74 the Differentiate d Services Field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2 PPP over 61 SONET/SDH 5 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2 6 9 8 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.
RF C# Full Name S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 130 5 Network Time Protocol (Version 3) Specification, Implementation and Analysis 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 1519 Classless Inter-Domain Routing 7.6.1 (CIDR): an Address Assignment and Aggregation Strategy 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 154 2 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) Clarifications and Extensions for 7.6.
RFC Full Name # S-Series S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 4291 Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Addressing Architecture 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 4443 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the IPv6 Specification 7.8.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 4861 8.3.12.0 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 4862 IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration 8.3.12.0 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for OSPF protocol. Table 149. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) RFC # Full Name S-Series/ZSeries S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 1587 The OSPF Not-SoStubby Area (NSSA) Option 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2154 OSPF with Digital Signatures 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) 2370 The OSPF Opaque LSA Option 7.6.1 9.8(0.
RFC# Full Name S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 5308 Routing IPv6 with IS-IS 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) draft-ietfisisigpp2poverlan-06 Point-to-point operation over LAN in link-state routing protocols 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.1) draftkaplanisis-e xteth-02 Extended Ethernet Frame Size 9.8(0.0P2) Support 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.10(0.1) 9.10(0.
Network Management The following table lists the Dell EMC Networking OS support per platform for network management protocol. Table 153. Network Management RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 1155 Structure and Identification of Management Information for TCP/IP-based Internets 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 1156 Management Information Base for 7.6.1 Network Management of TCP/IP-based internets 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.
RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 2572 Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 2574 User-based Security Model 7.6.1 (USM) for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMPv3) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 2575 View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.
RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON High Capacity Networks (64 bits): Ethernet Statistics High-Capacity Table, Ethernet History HighCapacity Table 3416 Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 3418 Management Information Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.
RFC# Full Name S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON draftietfnetmod interfac escfg-03 Defines a YANG data model for the configuration of network interfaces. Used in the Programmatic Interface RESTAPI feature. 9.2(0.0) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) IEEE 802.1A B Management Information Base module for LLDP configuration, statistics, local system data and remote systems data components. 7.7.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) IEEE 802.
RFC# Full Name SIONMIB by providing proprietary SNMP OIDs for other counters displayed in the "show interfaces" output) FORCE Force10 Enterprise Link 10Aggregation MIB LINKA GGMIB S4810 S3048–ON S4048–ON Z9100–ON S4048T-ON S6010–ON 7.6.1 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(0.0P2) 9.8(0.0P5) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) 9.8(1.0) FORCE Force10 E-Series Enterprise 10Chassis MIB CHASS IS-MIB FORCE Force10 File Copy MIB 10(supporting SNMP SET COPY- operation) CONFI G-MIB 7.7.1 9.8(0.
Some pages of iSupport require a login. To request an iSupport account, go to: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/AccountRequest/AccountRequest.aspx If you have forgotten or lost your account information, contact Dell TAC for assistance.
66 X.509v3 supports X.509v3 standards. Topics: • • • • • • • • • Introduction to X.509v3 certificates X.509v3 support in Information about installing CA certificates Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) Information about installing trusted certificates Transport layer security (TLS) Online Certificate Status Protocol (OSCP) Verifying certificates Event logging Introduction to X.509v3 certificates X.
Advantages of X.509v3 certificates Public key authentication is preferred over password-based authentication, although both may be used in conjunction, for various reasons. Public-key authentication provides the following advantages over normal password-based authentication: • • • Public-key authentication avoids the human problems of low-entropy password selection and provides more resistance to brute-force attacks than password-based authentication.
The other hosts on the network, such as the SUT switch, syslog server, and OCSP server, generate private keys and create Certificate Signing Requests (CSRs). The hosts then upload the CSRs to the Intermediate CA or make the CSRs available for the Intermediate CA to download. generates a CSR using the crypto cert generate request command. The hosts on the network (SUT, syslog, OCSP…) also download and install the CA certificates from the Root and Intermediate CAs.
Installing CA certificate To install a CA certificate, enter the crypto ca-cert install {path} command in Global Configuration mode. Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) Certificate Signing Request (CSR) enables a device to get a X.509v3 certificate from a CA. In order for a device to get a X.509v3 certificate, the device first requests a certificate from a CA through a Certificate Signing Request (CSR).
NOTE: The command contains multiple options with the Common Name being a required field and blanks being filled in for unspecified fields. Information about installing trusted certificates Dell EMC Networking OS also enables you to install a trusted certificate. The system can then present this certificate for authentication to clients such as SSH and HTTPS. This trusted certificate is also presented to the TLS server implementations that require client authentication such as Syslog.
TLS compression is disabled by default. TLS session resumption is also supported to reduce processor and traffic overhead due to public key cryptographic operations and handshake traffic. However, the maximum time allowed for a TLS session to resume without repeating the TLS authentication or handshake process is configurable with a default of 1 hour. You can also disable session resumption.
Configuring Revocation Behavior You can configure the system behavior if an OCSP responder fails. By default, when all the OCSP responders fail to send a response to an OSCP request, the system accepts the certificate and logs the event. However, you can configure the system to reject the certificate in case OCSP responders fail.
• A secure session negotiation fails due to invalid, expired, or revoked certificate. 1070 X.
